You are on page 1of 258

PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION

TNPRD/SUBSTATION AND EHV SUBSTATION


SPECIFICATIONS & EQUIPMENT SECTION

February 2009

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION TD-27/2A

SSU
UBBSSTTA
ATTIIO
ONNA
AUUTTO
OMMA ATTIIO
ONN SSY
YSSTTEEM
M FFO
ORR EEH
HVV
SSU
UBBSSTTA
ATTIIO
ONNSS

I. SCOPE
This technical description covers PPC’s technical, functional, configuration and testing
requirements for a substation automation system for extra high voltage (ehv) substations
with three (3) 400kV and 150kV buses respectively.
The substation automation system shall be digital and shall include control, protection,
monitoring, measurement functions and teletransmission of data and commands.

II. KEY WORDS


Digital control and protection system for ehv substation, computerized control system for
ehv substation, substation automation system

III. STANDARDS
The applicable standards for this automated digital control and protection system for
switching station are the following:
• IEC – 60870 – 5 – 101
• IEC – 60870 – 5 – 103
• IEC – 60870 – 5 – 104
• IEC – 60255 – 5
• IEC – 60255 – 22 – 1
• IEC – 60255 – 22 – 2
• IEC – 60255 – 22 – 3
• IEC – 60255 – 22 – 4
• IEC – 60068 – 2 – 6
• IEC – 61850

IV. USE
The Substation Automation System (S.A.S) for ehv substations, which is SCADA like, is
to be used for the control, protection and supervision of PPC’s Air insulated (AIS) 400
/150/30KV ehv substations and for the 150/20KV substations if it happens to be installed
inside the ehv substations.

-1-
V. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
This automated digital control and protection system for ehv substations, shall be capable
of withstanding the following climatic conditions:
a. Ambient temperature during operation : -5 0 C to +50 0C
b. Ambient temperature during storage : -25 0C to +55 0C
c. Relative humidity : 5% - 90%
d. Altitude level : Up to 1000m above sea level

VI. SUPPORT DOCUMENTS


The substation is automation system for ehv substation shall be designed with the
instructions contained in this hereby technical description and with the information
provided in the following documents which will be made available every time in the
inquiry.

a. Ehv substation single line diagram


b. Ehv substation layout drawing in which the following are depicted:
- Location of ehv substation primary equipment
- Relay kiosks
- Ehv substation’s control building
c. Switchgear interlocking diagrams only for the 400kV side.
d. List of commands to the substation equipment.
e. List of digital event and alarm signals for this hereby substation automation system.
f. List of analogue measurements for this thereby substation automation system
g. List of commands received from transmission’s system control center (TCC) and if
applicable from the distributions peripheral control center (DCC).
h. List of events and alarms to be transmitted to the transmission’s system control center
and to the distribution’s peripheral control center (if applicable)
i. List of measurements received from TCC and from DCC (if required).
j. Specifications for distance relays, overcurrent relays, autotransformer differential
relays, bus-bar differential relays, transformer differential relays (if required), voltage
relays and autotransformer overcurrent mass protection relay.
k. Total number of panels to be employed
l. Number of 20KV bays in relation with the metalclad panels (if applicable)

VII. TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE EHV SUBSTATION TO BE


CONTROLLED
• Nominal voltage at the 400KV side : 400KV
• Maximum Operating Voltage at the 400KV side : 420KV
• Minimum Operating Voltage at the 400KV side : 380KV
• Nominal voltage at the 150KV side : 150KV
• Maximum Operating Voltage at the 150KV side : 170KV
• Minimum Operating Voltage at the 150KV side : 140KV
• Short Circuit level at the 400KV side : 40KA
• Short Circuit level at the 150KV side : 30KA
• Basic Insulation level at the 400KV side : 1550KV
• Basic Insulation level at the 150KV side : 750KV
• Nominal voltage of the 30KV side : 30KV
• Maximum voltage of the 30KV side : 36KV

-2-
• Short circuit level of the 30KV side : 20KΑ
• Basic Insulation level of the 30KV side : 250KV
• Nominal voltage for the 20KV : 20KV
• Maximum voltage for the 20KV : 24KV
• Maximum short circuit level of 20KV : 10KA
• Basic Insulation level at 20KV : 125KV
• Nominal frequency : 50Hz
• Frequency tolerance : ± 0,2 Hz
• Available auxiliary Voltage for control and signalling :220V DC for the 400KV and
30KV side and 110V DC for
the 150KV and 20 KV (if
applicable) side
• Available AC auxiliary Voltage :3Φ,380V AC and 1Φ,220V AC

VIII. REQUIRED FUNCTIONS OF THE SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM


FOR EHV SUBSTATIONS
The substation automation system shall be capable of the following functions:
1. Control and supervision of the ehv substation
2. Switchgear interlockings
3. Synchro-check with phasing
4. Autotransformer tap-changer control
5. Service transformer 30/0,4 kV tap-changer control
6. Transformer tap-changer control (if required)
7. Measurements
8. Event recording and alarm handling
9. Protection
10. Automatic switching sequences
11. Fault Recording

1. Control and supervision of the ehv substation


a. The control must handle:

1. Selection of control Position


a. Locally, via control switches located on the primary equipment

b. From the bay control unit, - bay level (located in relay kiosks)

c. From the HMI, - station level (Control building of the EHV Substation)

d. The 400KV, 150KV and 30KV equipment shall be controlled and remotely
from the transmission’s system control center (TCC) and the 20KV equipment
along with the 150/20KV transformer bays (if required) shall be remotely
controlled and from the distribution’s system control center (DCC).

e. The commands will be issued each time only from one control place excluding
at the same time the other three. The priority (switching authority) of commands
shall be in the order indicated above and shall be carried out either via software

-3-
or hardware. Each control level shall have proper indication indicating the
selected position.

f. The control for the 400KV, 150KV, 30KV and the 150/20KV transformer bays
(if required) shall be as per bay while for the 20KV side (if required) as per
transformer bay including all of its corresponding feeders.

2. Selection of equipment and type of command for control operation (opening or


closing)

3. Execution or cancellation of command

4. Execution of the command when the conditions of interlocks, synchro-check or


other conditions are met

5. Capability of overriding of interlocks and execution of the automatic switching


sequences.

6. The apparatuses to be controlled are the following:


a. 400 KV and 150KV Circuit Breakers associated with transmission line
bays, autotransformers, transformers (if required), power plant connecting
lines (if required), bus coupling and 150KV capacitors (if applicable)
b. 400KV bus Disconnectors of transmission line bays, autotransformers,
power plant connecting lines (if required), bus coupling and bus section
disconnectors.
c. Disconnectors of 400KV transmission lines and power plant connecting
lines (if required).
d. 400KV Earthing Switches of the above mentioned (a and b) 400KV
Disconnectors.
e. 150KV Bus Disconnectors of transmission line bays, autotransformers,
transformers (if required), power plant connecting lines (if required) and
buscoupling disconnectors
f. Mechanism of increase, decrease and emergency stop of the step of the tap
changer (OLTC) of the autotransformers, transformers (if it is required) and
service transformers 30/0,4KV.
g. 30KV circuit breakers
h. 20KV circuit breakers (if required) installed in metal-clad panels named
TM (incoming bays from transformers), BSM (bus section bays), ULM
(underground feeder bays), OLM (overhead feeder bays), CM (capacitor
bank feeder bays) and IPPM (independent Power Producer connection
panels).

7. At table 1 of the attached appendix, the necessary commands from the Substation
Automation System (S.A.S) to the ehv substation equipment are presented, as well
as the commands that required to be received from TCC and DCC remote control
centers.

-4-
b. The supervision shall include the following:

1. The position of each 400KV, 150KV, 30KV and 20KV(if required) ehv
substation circuit breakers on a continuous basis
2. The position of each 400KV, 150KV and 30KV, ehv substation
disconnectors (isolators) on a continuous basis.
3. The position of each 400KV and 150KV ehv substation earthing switch on
a continuous basis
4. Every detected change shall cause a change in the single-line diagram
displayed on the operator’s terminal (HMI unit) located in the ehv
substation control building, notation in the event list and a print-out
5. Alarms shall be issued, in the form of lists and print-out, in case the
position changes are not caused by a command.
6. At the operator’s terminal and specifically at the colour visual display, the
single-line diagram of the ehv substation (including the future bays of the
switching station with dotted-lines), details of the status of breakers and
disconnectors (isolators) and measurements shall be depicted.
7. The naming of the equipment shall be as indicated in the single-line
diagram of the ehv substation which is provided by T/NPRD of PPC S.A.

8. The substation automation system for ehv substation shall also allow
supervision of all ehv substation 400KV and 150KV circuit breaker and
motor driven (electrically operated) disconnectors and earthing switches
from the transmission system’s control center (TCC).

9. The substation automation system shall allow supervision of the


transformer 150/20KV bay circuit beakers and disconnectors and 20KV
circuit breakers from the distribution system’s control center, if the ehv
substation contains and a 150/20KV substation.

10. The naming of the equipment shall be as indicated in the single line
diagram of the ehv substation provided by T/NPRD/PPC S.A.

11. At table 2 of the attached appendix, the positions of substation equipment


statuses, that must be indicated and transmitted to the TCC and DCC, are
presented.

2. Switchgear Interlocking

a. The interlocking functions shall grant permission to operate apparatuses such as


disconnectors and earthing switches.
b. The interlocking functions for the 400kV side will be and as per the schematic
diagrams, which will accompany this technical description in every inquiry.
c. The interlocking functions shall also ensure fail-safe switching.
d. The interlockings between equipment of the bay shall be included in the bay control
unit (IEC-61850 GOOSE operation between IEDs). The interlockings concerning
interlocks among bays (interbay communication) shall be included in the HMI center.

-5-
e. As it is indicated in paragraph 2-b above, the interlockings for the 400kV side shall
be and as per the schematic diagrams, however for reasons of further assistance to
the procedure, a complete description of the 400kV side interlockings also follows.

A. 400KV side Interlockings

Attention The following interlockings are valid for a ehv substation with
three (3) 400KV buses.

1. The operation of transmission line 400kV disconnector (isolator) is allowed


providing the following conditions are met:
 The earthing switch of the transmission line disconnector is open
 The earthing switch of the bus bar disconnectors associated with the
transmission line in question is open
 The 400KV circuit breaker of the transmission line is open

The operation of a 400kV power unit line disconnector is allowed providing that
same conditions as those of a transmission line disconnector are present and in
addition, the interlocking requirements of the power unit are also met.
2. The operation of a 400KV transmission line disconnector’s earthing switch is
allowed providing that the following conditions are met:
 The disconnector of the transmission line in question is open and
 The transmission line in question is out of service.
3. The operation of a disconnector of the bus bars associated with a 400kV
transmission line, a 400kV power unit line or a line feeding an autotransformer,
which are happen to be located between the bus bars tie circuit breaker and bus
bars section, is allowed providing that the following conditions are met.
• The bus bars disconnector’s earthing switch of the corresponding 400kV
transmission line is open and
• The circuit breaker of the corresponding 400kV transmission line is open
and
• The disconnectors of the other bus bars of the same 400kV line are open
and
• The bus bar to be free of any earthing switches (Earthing switches located at
the end of the bus bar to be open) and
• The disconnector of the bus section is open or the earthing switch at the
other side of bus section disconnector is open.
In excess of the previous procedure and with the aim of transferring a 400kV
line to another bus under load conditions (this operation is allowed only from
the ehv substation’s control building) the operation of a bus-bar disconnector
associated with o 400kV transmission line, a 400kV power unit line or a line
feeding an autotransformer is allowed providing that the following conditions
are met

-6-
• The earthing switches of bus-bars disconnectors of the 400kV line in
question is open and
• The disconnector of one of the other buses of the same 400kV line is closed
and
• The buses of the two bus disconnectors in question are tied together (For the
400kV lines between bus-tie and bus-section : The 400kV bus-coupling
circuit breaker closed and also closed the 400kV disconnectors located at
both sides of the bus tie of the buses in question. For the 400kV lines
beyond the bus-section: The bus-tie 400kV circuit breaker closed and also
closed the disconnectors located at both sides of the bus-tie of the buses in
question and in addition closed the 400kV disconnectors of the bus section
of the buses in question) and
• The bus is free of any earthing switches (earthing switches open at the ends
of the bus) and
• The disconnector of the bus section is open or the earthing switch at the
other end of the disconnector of the bus section is open.
4. The operation of the earthing switch of a power unit line disconnector is allowed
when the same conditions with that of the corresponding earthing switch of the
transmission line disconnector are met and in addition the interlocking
requirements originated from the power unit are also met.
The operation of an earthing switch of the bus disconnectors of the 400kV
transmission line and 400kV power unit line is allowed when the following
conditions are met:
• The disconnector of the line in question is open and
• The bus disconnectors of the same line are also open

5. The operation of the 400KV bus coupling disconnector of bus I or bus III is
allowed providing that the following conditions are met:
 The 400kV bus coupling circuit breaker is open and
 The 400kV bus coupling disconnector of bus II which is towards to the
disconnector to be operated is open and
 The earthing switch which grounds the section of bus between the
disconnector which is to be operated and the 400kV bus coupling circuit
breaker is open and
 The earthing switch which grounds the section of the bus which is right after
the 400kV bus coupling circuit breaker is open and
 The bus is free of any earthing switches (earthing switches are open at the
end of the bus) and
 The section bus disconnector is open or the earthing switch at the other end
of the bus section disconnector is open.

The operation of one (1) of the 400kV bus-tie disconnectors associated with bus
II is allowed providing that same conditions exist as those of the disconnectors
of buses I and III.

-7-
In excess of the previous procedure the operation of the one (1) of the 400kV
bus-tie disconnectors associated with bus II is allowed when bus II is tied to
some other bus, that is when the following conditions exist:
• The 400kV bus tie circuit breaker is closed and
• The other disconnector of bus II is closed and
• The bus-tie disconnector of the other bus which is located however on the
same side of the 400kV bus-tie circuit breaker with the disconnector to be
operated, is closed
6. The operation of an earthing switch of a 400KV bus-tie disconnector which
grounds the buses (I or II or III) is allowed when the bus in question is free of
voltage, which means:
• The bus tie disconnector associated with the earthing switch which is about
to be operated is open and
• The bus section disconnector of the bus in question is open and
• All bus disconnectors of the 400kV lines which happens to be between bus
tie and bus section are open
or
• The bus tie disconnector associated with the earthing switch which is about
to be operated is open and
• All the bus disconnectors (of the bus in question at both side of the bus-
section) of the 400kV lines are open and providing that the bus section
disconnector is closed

The operation of an earthing switch of a 400kV bus-tie disconnector which


grounds the bus section between the disconnector in question and the bus-tie, is
allowed providing that the following conditions are met:
• The four (4) disconnectors of the bus-tie are all open

7. The operation of a disconnector of the bus section is allowed providing that the
following conditions exist:
• Both earthing switches of the bus section disconnector are open and
• The earthing switch of the bus tie disconnector which grounds the bus under
question (towards the bus section) is open and
• Is deenergized at least one of the two sections of the bus section (all bus
disconnectors of the 400kV lines and, on situation, the disconnectors of the
bus tie of the bus in question are all open).

8. The operation of the one of the earthing switches of the bus section
disconnectors is allowed providing the following conditions exist:
• The bus section disconnector associated with the earthing switch which is
about to be operated is open and
• The bus in question in the section in which is to be grounded is free of
voltage (All the disconnectors of the bus in question are open)

-8-
B. 150KV side Interlockings

No schematic drawings are provided for this voltage level.


Attention: The following are valid for ehv substation with three (3) 150KV buses.

1. The operation of any disconnector (isolator) under load conditions is


prohibited.
2. The operation of any disconnector (isolator) is prohibited when its earthing
switch is closed.
3. The closing of any earthing switch is prohibited if it has not been secured that
its corresponding disconnector is opened.
4. The closing of any circuit breaker is prohibited if prior it has not been secured
that the disconnectors located at both sides of the circuit breaker are closed.
5. The closing of any circuit breaker is prohibited if there is trip command from
its corresponding protection relay or trip checking.
6. The closing of the transformer 150KV bay circuit breaker is prohibited if the
earthing switch of the medium voltage transformer bay is closed.
7. The transformer 150KV bay circuit breaker must be open (via advanced
contact) if closing of the earthing switch of the medium voltage transformer
bay (metalclad panel) is to be attempted.
8. The opening of the transformer, 150KV bay circuit breaker shall produce
opening to the medium voltage transformer bay circuit breaker and this
medium voltage transformer bay circuit breaker will lock in this position
during all the time that the transformer 150KV bay circuit breaker remains
opened.

Additionally the following shall apply:


9. The operation of a bus disconnector of a 150kV bay is allowed under the
following conditions:
• The disconnectors of all other buses of the above 150kV bay are open and
• The 150kV circuit breaker of above bay is open.

In excess of the above procedure, the operation of a bus disconnector of the


150kV bay is allowed if the following conditions exist:
• The disconnector of another bus of the same 150kV bay is closed and
• The bus tie 150kV circuit breaker is closed and
• The bus tie disconnectors of the two buses in question are closed.

10. The operation of a disconnector of the 150kV bus-tie is allowed if the


following conditions exist:
• The bus-tie 150kV circuit breaker is open and
• The bus-tie disconnector of the bus which is closer to the bus in question is
open.

-9-
C. Interlockings of the 30KV side

No drawings are provided for this voltage level.


1. Interlocks between 30KV disconnector (isolator) and the 30KV circuit breaker
of the shunt reactor.
• For the 30 KV disconnector to be closed, the 30KV circuit breaker must
be opened.
2. Interlocks between autotransformer circuit breaker 150KV and the 30KV
disconnector (isolator) and 30KV circuit breaker of the shunt reactor.
• For the 150KV autotransformer circuit breaker to open the following
conditions must be satisfied.
a. Either the 30KV disconnector (isolator) to be open.
b. Or the 30KV disconnector (isolator) to be closed and at the same time the
30KV circuit breaker to be open.

D. Interlockings of 20KV side (if required, that is if the ehv substation includes a
150/20KV substation).
No schematic diagrams are provided for this voltage level.

1. The operation of any circuit breaker of a medium voltage bay (TM, BSM, OLM,
CM, IPPM) is allowed providing the circuit breaker’s carriage is in the operating
position or in the test position (metal-clad panels).
2. The circuit breaker’s carriage of the medium voltage bays (TM, OLM, CM,
IPPM) can be moved from the test position to the operating position only if the
grounding (earthing) switch of the medium voltage bay is opened.
3. The circuit breaker of the medium voltage bays (TM, OLM, CM, IPPM) can be
closed in the operating position only if a grounding (earthing) switch of the
medium voltage bay is opened.
4. The circuit breaker of the medium voltage bay TM (transformer incoming bay)
can be closed only if the corresponding high voltage (150KV) transformer
circuit breaker is closed.
5. The operation of the grounding (earthing) switch of the medium voltage bays
(TM, OLM, CM, IPPM) is allowed only if the circuit breaker carriage is in the
test position.
6. The operation of the grounding switch of the “TM” (transformer incoming)
medium voltage bay is allowed only if the corresponding high voltage side
(150KV) transformer bay circuit breaker is open.

3. Synchro-check with phasing

a. The phasing function is to be carried out when two asynchronous systems are
going to be connected, so that stress is avoided on the network and its
components. The phasing function shall compensate for measured slip
frequency as well as circuit breaker closing times.

- 10 -
b. Synchro-check function shall involve the 400KV and 150KV transmission lines
at 150KV autotransformer bays and bus coupling 400KV and 150KV circuit
breakers.

c. In addition, the phasing function shall have the following features:


1. Settable voltage, phase angle and frequency difference.
2. Energizing for the following conditions:
- Dead line – live bus
- Live line – dead bus
- Dead line – dead bus

d. The signals for the synchro-check function will be provided via VTs, which
have secondaries of 100 V A.C. for the 400KV and 120 V A.C. for the
3 3
150KV.

e. Furthermore, it is clarified that the following must be taken into consideration.

1. For the 150KV buses and lines, the 120 V shall correspond to
3
160KV

2. For the 400KV buses and lines, the 100 V shall correspond 400KV
3
3. The synchro-check function will be fed three (3) line-to-line voltages for
the 400KV side and line-to-neutral (ΦΒ) voltage for the 150KV side and
the substation automation system for the ehv substation shall calculate
phase angles and frequency.

f. The synchro-check with phasing shall be carried out from the bay control units
and from the operator’s terminal located in the ehv substation’s control
building.(HMI center)

g. It is noted that the specified closing time of the 400KV and 150KV breakers is
110ms and 100ms respectively.

h. For the control of the synchro-check function, on the HMI center PC will be
displayed:

• The six measured magnitudes (V1, φ1, f1, V2, φ2, f2) and the
corresponding differences (∆V, ∆φ, ∆f), related to the permissible
synchro-check limits.
• The voltage comparison figure (from the above mentioned four) applied
• In case of synchro-check operation failure, the reasons of failure (out of
range voltage or/and angle or/and frequency).
• Notification message “closing command of the circuit breaker” in case
of successful synchro-check function.

- 11 -
i. The substation automation system for the ehv substation shall also allow
synchro-check with phasing from the system’s control centers (transmission’s
and distribution’s) with the same features as those described above.

4. Autotransformer Tap Changer Control

a. The substation automation system for the ehv substation shall control the taps of
all autotransformers, if any, of the ehv substation. The number of taps and the
corresponding voltage level of each tap is indicated below:

H. V. (400KV) M. V. (150KV)

180120
178055
175950
173805
171615
169380
167105
164785
162415
160000 +10 steps
400KV 157535 Principal tap
155020 -8 steps
152450
149825
147145
144405
141605
138745
135820

b. For all autotransformers a voltage regulator relay shall be provided for the
automatic tap changer control function if the tap changer control function can
not be accomplished by other means.

c. Tap changer control will be carried out from the following points:
1. Locally, on the autotransformer itself
2. The bay control unit (relay kiosk)
3. The HMI center (ehv substation’s control building)
4. The transmission system’s control center

- 12 -
d. Furthermore, tap changer position shall be displayed on the visual display unit
located in the ehv substation’s control building (HMI center) and also in the
transmission system’s control center console.

e. It should also be noted that the system shall contain capability for emergency
stop of the tap changing procedure.

5. Transformer Tap changer Control (if required, that is if the ehv substation
includes and a 150/20KV substation)

The substation automation system for ehv substation shall control the taps of all
transformers, of the substation.
a. The number of taps and the corresponding voltage level of each tap is indicated below:

1 161250
2 159375
3 157500
Voltage variation 4 155625
+ 7.5% 5 153750
150KV 6 151875
-12.5% 7 150000
in steps of 1.25% 8 148125
9 146250
10 144375
11 142500
12 140625
13 138750
14 136875 21.000 V
15 135000 or
16 133125 15.750 V
17 131250

b. For all transformers, a voltage regulator shall be provided for the automatic tap changer
control function if the tap changer control function can not be accomplished by other
means.

c. Tap changer control will be carried out from the following points:
1. Locally, on the transformer itself
2. The bay control unit (relay kiosk)
3. The HMI center (ehv substation’s control building)
4. The distribution’s system control center

d. Furthermore, tap changer position shall be displayed on the visual display unit located in
the ehv substation’s control building (HMI center) and also in the distribution system’s
control center console.

e. It should also be noted that the system shall contain capability for emergency stop of the
tap changing procedure.

- 13 -
6. Measurements

6.1 The substation automation system for the ehv substation, after receiving analog
signals from VTs and CTs and after calculating certain parameters, shall display on
the visual display unit, located in the ehv substation’s control building, and transmit
to the TCC and DCC the values of measurements that are presented on table 4. It
should be pointed out, that the ratios and classes of the voltage and current
transformers, appear at the single-line diagrams of the ehv substation which are
included in the inquiry.

7 Event Recording and Alarm handling

a. Events and alarms generated by the equipment of the ehv substation shall be
displayed in an event list in the visual display unit at the operator’s terminal in
the ehv substation’s control room (HMI)

b. Alarms shall also be displayed, but separately from the events

c. The events and alarms shall also be printed on a printer located in the ehv
substation’s control room.

d. The number of digital signals (events and alarms) will vary from ehv substation
to ehv substation. The (total) number will be estimated every time from tables 2
and 3 of this hereby technical description.

e. All digital input signals whether are events or alarms shall be suitable for 220V
DC for the 400KV and 30KV side and 110V DC for the 150KV side.

f. Characterization of all events and alarms will be curried out via software after
the awarding of the contract by the supplier with the assistance of PPC’s
engineers.

g. The time resolution of all events and alarms shall be 1 ms

h. The events shall be registered in a chronological event list in which the type of
event and its time of occurrence are indicated. All events shall be stored in the
computer. Printouts shall also be possible.

i. The operator shall be able to call up the chronological event list on the visual
display unit at any time for the entire ehv substation or sections of it.

j. The operator shall be able to call up for viewing, a certain type or group of
events based on.
• Date and time
• Bay
• Device.

- 14 -
k. All events and alarms shall be displayed in English. A list, however must be
provided where all events and alarms shall be translated in Greek.

l. All events and alarms shall be automatically recorded on the Mass Storage Unit
of the system.

m. The system shall be designed to avoid sequence memory of becoming full.


Should the “memory full” condition occurs; the system must be capable of
storing the latest events and alarms and erase the oldest ones.

n. All digital signal inputs must be decoupled from the plant by the use of opto –
isolators or similar which will give input isolation of at least 2KV.

o. The event and alarm recording function shall be designed for reliable long-term
operation in a hostile environment where electrical / mechanical noise and
disturbances are present as well as high electromagnetic fields. It shall process
and record valid event and alarm information and not be adversely affected by
its environment.

p. The alarm list shall contain a summary display of the present alarm situation.
Each alarm shall be reported on one line which shall contains the following:
• The alarm date and time
• The name of the device that the alarm is generated from
• A descriptive text
• The acknowledgement state

q. The operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms on the display. Acknowledge


alarms shall be marked in the list.

r. Alarms that appear and disappear without being acknowledged shall be


specially marked in the alarm list.

s. Capability for selection of a certain type or group of alarms shall be available as


well as for the events.

t. Every alarm shall be announced and by the sound of a horn. This means that the
system must be equipped and with a horn.
Disabling of the horn shall be achieved, if desired, via keyboard/mouse from the
HMI center.
Acknowledgement of the horn shall be carried from the HMI center via
keyboard / mouse and then the horn shall be deactivated.
- Supply voltage of the horn: 220V D.C.

u. A number of events and alarms shall also be transmitted to the transmission’s


system control center. The list of events and alarms to be transmitted is
indicated in the attached Tables 2 and 3.

v. A number of events and alarms shall be also be transmitted to the transmission’s


and distribution’s system control center if the ehv substations includes a

- 15 -
150/20KV substation. The list of events and alarms is indicated in the attached
Tables 2 and 3.

Note
By an event is meant for example the opening or closing of a circuit breaker, the
operation of a relay, etc. By alarm is meant for example low SF6 of a circuit breaker, etc.

8. Protection
Protection relays of the numerical type shall be included in the supply of the substation
automation system for ehv substation.
The relays to be provided are the following:

a. For the 400KV side of the ehv substation


• 400KV Distance Protection Relay in accordance with specification SS-108
• Autotransformer differential Relay in accordance with specification SS-68
• Bus-bar differential protection in accordance with specification SS-55
• Phase and ground overcurrent relay in accordance with technical description
TD-48 for the protection of the autotransformer’s 400kV winding.
• Single phase autotransformer overcurrent mass protection relay, in accordance
with technical description TD-49.

b. For the 150KV side of the ehv substation and for the 150KV TL.
• 150KV distance protection relay in accordance with technical description TD-16.
• Phase and ground overcurrent directional relay for the 150KV lines in accordance
with specification SS-131
• Bus-bar differential protection in accordance with specification SS-55
• Phase and ground overcurrent relay in accordance with technical description TD-
48 for the protection of the autotransformer’s 150kV winding.

c. For the 30 KV side of the ehv substation


• Phase and ground overcurrent relay in accordance with technical description
TD-48 for the autotransformer 30KV winding protection
• Phase and ground overcurrent relay in accordance with technical description
TD-48 for 30KV reactor protection
• Voltage relay supplied from VTs connected in broken delta for protection of
30KV, 50MVAR shunt reactors against earth faults in accordance with technical
description TD-52.
• Voltage relay supplied from single-phase VT located in the neutral of a 30KV,
50MVAR shunt reactor for the detection of the overvoltage conditions in
accordance with description TD-46.

d. For the 150kV capacitor bays (if required)


• Numerical overcurrent and overload relay in accordance with TD-37
• Current unbalance relay in accordance with TD-38
• Voltage relay in accordance with TD-39

- 16 -
e. For the transformer 150/20 KV bay if a 150/20KV substation is included in the
ehv substation.
• Transformer differential relay in accordance with specification SS-100.
It should be noted that the transformer differential relay will cover and include
in its protection zone and the 20KV bus of the substation.
• One (1) phase earth overcurrent relay, as per TD-31B technical description
• One (1) definite time overcurrent relay suitable for the detection of small earth
fault currents, as per specification SS-94

9. Automatic Switching Sequences

a. Sequence control is an automatic function that reduces the interaction between


the operator and the system. With one command, the operator shall be able, for
example, to start a sequence that will end with the processed device connected
to one of the busbars.
The sequence shall perform the same checks and operations every time it starts,
which shall ensure safe operation.
The sequence function shall include the following sequences:

1. Connect a transmission line (feeder) to a specific busbar


2. Disconnect a transmission line.
3. Connect an autotransformer to a specific busbar
4. Disconnect an autotransformer
5. Connect a power plant unit feeder to a specific busbar
6. Disconnect a power plant unit feeder
7. Connect a transformer to a specific bus (if required)
8. Disconnect a transformer (if required)
9. Busbar transfer.

b. The automatic switching sequence function will be used in conjunction with the
HMI center and bay control units and execution shall be carried out form the
operator’s terminal (HMI center) and bay control units.

10. Fault Recording

a. The fault recording function shall be used to sense and record data related to
faults (prior to, during and after the faults). The fault recording function shall
record eight (8) analog signals per 400KV and 150KV line related to :
1. Three (3) phase-to-phase voltages
2. One (1) open-delta voltage (100V) (residual voltage)
3. Three (3) phase-to-phase currents
4. One (1) phase-to-neutral current

b. The fault recording function will be used in conjunction with the HMI center

c. The voltage and current input signals will either be transmitted to the HMI
center from the bay control units or be input via analog transformers or directly
from CTs and VTs if the proposed system allows such a transmission.

- 17 -
d. Voltage of analog inputs
− For the 400KV : 100 V rms.
3
− For the 150KV : 120 V rms.
3
e. Current of analog inputs for
both 400KV and 150KV : 1A rms.
f. Sampling rate : 1 – 9,3 KHz
g. Pre – fault recording time : ≥ 60ms
h. Post – fault recording time : ≥ 2sec
i. Total recording time : ≥ 5 sec

IX. REQUIRED STRUCTURE (CONFIGURATION) OF THE SUBSTATION


AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR EHV SUBSTATION

1. The structure of the substation automation system shall be of the distributed type with
star arrangement and shall be divided into a two (2) levels with capability for
communication with two (2) system’s control centers, if the ehv substation includes a
150/20KV substation. Whether the ehv substation includes a 150/20KV substation, it
will always be indicated in the inquiry.
The required structure is indicated on Fig No1 below:

- 18 -
NOTES:
1. Station Level equipment is located in the ehv substation’s control building
2. Bay level equipment is located in the various relay kiosks of the ehv substation.
3. Capability shall exist for GPS signal and for internal time signal.
4. Protection relays include distance relays, Autotransformer / transformer (if
required) differential relays, overcurrent relays and voltage relays.
5. For the above serial communication structure there shall be redundancy for each
connection shown.
6. The bay control units and the protection relays will be connected in a single fiber
optic cable (f.o.c) loop (network redundancy). In case of large number of bay
control units, the above scheme can be implemented by the use of more than one
loop.
7. Bay control units and protection relays, can be connected in the loop directly or
within appropriate devices (e.g. Ethernet switches, functionally based on
IEC-61850-3). The direct connection of each device in the loop and the connection
between loops will be implemented based on IEC-61850 communication protocol
and with bidirectional information transfer.
8. The Ethernet loops will communicate with central units-servers or industrial PCs,
within IEC-61850 protocol, at station level.
9. Central units can be connected with the above mentioned loops or with a different
loop, in accordance with the conditions mentioned above.

2. Bay control units required functions

The bay control units shall be capable of the following:


a. Signal acquisition
b. Acquisition of measured values and metering data.
c. Data processing such as
− Computing of Vrms, Irms P, Q, S, Cos φ and frequency from input
values.
− Deciding how much information to transmit to the HMI center in each
sampling cycle.
d. Synchro-check with phasing in accordance with the requirements described in
paragraph VIII-3 of this hereby technical description.
e. Selection of control position
 Local: From the bay control unit itself
 Remote: From the HMI center or system’s control center and provide
signalling when the control is carried out on the equipment themselves.
f. Local control and operation
 Local control of circuit breakers, and all electrically operated disconnecting
switches and earthing switches of the bay.
g. Control of Autotransformer and Transformer (if applicable) tap changing in
accordance with paragraphs VIIΙ – 4 and 5 of this hereby technical description.
h. Display of bay’s single line diagram and bay’s equipment status
i. Display of measurement values.
j. Transmission of data from numerical relays to the HMI center.
k. Interfacing with distance relays and autotransformer / transformer (if applicable)
differential relays and overcurrent relays

- 19 -
l. Switchgear interlocking in accordance with paragraph VIII-2 of this hereby
technical description
m. Automatic switching sequences in accordance with paragraph VIII-9
n. The bay control units shall be autonomous devices and can not be embodied in
relays.

3. Bay Control Units Additional Requirements

a. Location
The bay control units will be located inside the relay kiosks, which are located
throughout the ehv substation’s.

b. Interfacing
All bay control units shall contain an optical-fiber serial interface for connection
to the HMI center and a RS 232 serial interface for connection to a PC.
All optical-fiber cables will be part of the supply as well.

c. Interfacing with the equipment of the switchyard


The bay control units shall be capable of interfacing with the equipment of the
switchyard.
All digital and analog input signals from the equipment of the switchyard and
out-going carrying command and control signals to the various equipment will
interface with the bay control units through terminal blocks located inside the
relay kiosks.
These incoming and out-going signals will be wired by PPC with conventional
control cables of cross section of 2.5 mm2 (that is from the terminal blocks to
and from the switchyard equipment) except for the VTs and CTs circuits, which
utilize cables of 4mm2 in cross section

d. Isolation from the switchyard equipment


The bay control units shall provide isolation from the switchyard equipment via
heavy duty relay contacts or by other means.

e. Parameterization and control


Parameterization and control for the bay control units shall be performed via an
integrated graphic display and keypad and also via PC.

f. Analog inputs signals


Analog input signals can be input to the bay control units either via analog
transducers or by direct connection to CTs and VTs. If transducers are required,
the supplier will supply these transducers.

g. Mounting
The bay control units shall be suitable for panel flash mounting or ½ flash panel
mounting.

- 20 -
4. Human-Machine Interface center (HMI) functions and other requirements

The HMI center manages the bay control units and indirectly or directly the protection
relays, controls the interaction between the station level and HMI center, processes
information for the entire ehv substation and archives data in accordance with the
parameterized (setting) requirements of the user. Specifically the HMI center shall
perform the following:

a. Coordinate communication
− To the transmission’s system control center for the 400KV, 150KV and 30KV
− To the distribution’s system control center for the 20KV for the 150/20KV
transformers bays and 150KV transmission line bays if the ehv substation includes
a 150/20KV substation.
− To an evaluation center connected remotely via a telephone line using a modem
− To the bay control units and via the bay control units to the protection relays or to
the protection relays directly.

The above is for the purpose of controlling and monitoring activities at the ehv
substation and at system’s control centers as well as to provide data for use and
analysis.

b. Event recording and alarm handling in accordance with paragraph VIII – 7 of this
hereby technical description

c. Archiving of events

d. Time synchronization
Time synchronization shall be achieved by using GPS signal and by internal clock. In
other words, the HMI center shall be capable of been synchronized by GPS and to
switch automatically to an internal clock if the GPS satellites can not be located by the
ehv substation’s antenna.

e. Switchgear Interlocking
Switchgear interlocking in accordance with paragraph VIII – 2 of this hereby technical
description.

f. Displaying via the ehv substation’s visual display unit all measured and calculated
metering data, ehv substation’s one line diagram with real time circuit breaker,
disconnector and earthing switch status.

g. Self monitoring and system monitoring

h. Supervisory control and operation


Supervisory control and operation via the ehv substation’s computer affecting the
entire ehv substation and in accordance with paragraph VIII – 1 of this hereby
technical description.

- 21 -
i. Location and mounting
All the equipment required for communication and coordination reasons, except for the
equipment mentioned in paragraph IX-6a÷f, will be provided installed inside a metallic panel.

j. Fault Recording
Fault recording in accordance with the requirements of paragraph VIII-10 of this
hereby technical description.

k. Interfacing with the bay control units and relays and transmission’s system and
distribution’s system control centers (if required).

5. Mass Storage

It shall be possible to store historic event data and alarms on hard disks.
The system will be equipped with dual hard disks that will utilize “raid mirroring” for
storing event, alarm and fault data. This way the uninterrupted function of the HMI is
achieved, eliminating any risk of data loss.
The mass storage will be part of the HMI, capable of recording data of up to six (6)
months.

6. Human – machine interface center (HMI) equipment

The operator’s terminal (HMI), located in the ehv substation’s control building, shall
include the following equipment;

a. Two (2) duplicate industrial PCs, Pentium of the latest series, with related
software package, preferably based on a professional edition of “WINDOWS”,
for displaying
− ehv substation’s overview (single-line diagram)
− Detailed diagrams of substation
− Event and alarm list
− Alarm information
− Fault data and fault graphical representation
− Measurement data
− Autotransformer / transformer (if required) tap changer position
The two PCs are on hot redundancy (backup) allowing the concurrent access to the
same application (master-slave connection). In case of malfunction of the master, the
processing of all the system functions is automatically transferred to the slave.

b. Two (2) 21” colour monitors (VDU), TFT, of resolution of 1280X1024 pixels
and refresh frequency of 75Hz.
- One VDU, to be used for displaying detailed diagrams of the ehv substation.
- VDUs supply voltage : 220 V AC

c. A dot matrix printer with 24 pins for printing events and alarms.
- Printer supply voltage : 220V AC

- 22 -
d. A laser printer for screen shot printing, measurements and fault data printing
- Printer supply voltage : 220V AC

e. Two (2) keyboard and two (2) mouses

f. A UPS System for the uninterruptible supply of the PCs, and VDUs and printers
which shall consist of the following:
1. A DC/AC inverter which shall be equipped with an electrical transfer
switch (AC-input)
2. The DC input will be supplied from the ehv substation’s batteries
3. DC input voltage : 220V DC ±15%
4. AC output : 220V AC, 50Hz, 2000VA, 6 sockets
5. AC output tolerances : For voltage ±1%, For frequency ±0,75%
6. The DC/AC inverter with its accessories shall be supplied in a panel
suitable for floor standing of class protection of IP52

g. All the equipment required for the communication and coordination with the
system bay level.

7. System Safety

All programs and parameters of the substation automation system, must be securely
stored in flash EPROMS so that the system to be capable of starting automatically after
a power interruption.

X. TIME SYNCHRONIZATION

1. Time synchronization shall be achieved through GPS and automatically by internal


clock , should the ehv substation’s antenna can not locate the GPS satellites.
For this purpose a GPS antenna, GPS receiver and all necessary links and devices
associated with this application shall be included in the supply and be in accordance
with the requirements of paragraph XI below.

2. For the GPS time signal distribution to all relevant units within the ehv substation, a
master clock must be provided with no more than eight (8) units per branch.

XI. GPS ANTENNA AND RECEIVER

1. Antenna location : The antenna will be located on the roof


of the ehv substation’s control building

2. Antenna housing : The antenna shall be placed in a weather


proof plastic housing.

3. Lightning Protection : Surge protector with response time of


≤ 1nsec and a discharge current of 10KA,
housed in an aluminium case.

- 23 -
4. Signal strength at the input of the antenna : ~ 1X10 E-16 Watt, i.e. below the general
noise level.

5. Temperature Range : -300C to +850C

6. Antenna supports : the antenna will be supported by


brackets of anodised aluminium and
designed to withstand strong winds.

7. Low-noise preamplifier (optional, depending on


the supplier’s opinion, given the fact that the
antenna receiver cable distance is about 100m): Fitted behind the antenna shall be an
extremely low-noise preamplifier. The
low-noise preamplifier will be located
inside the ehv substation’s control
building.

GPS-receiver location : Inside the ehv substation’s control


building, rail mounted

8. GPS-receiver supply voltage : 220V DC

9. GPS-receiver configuration and setup : Via professional “windows” based software


which must be included in the supply.

10. GPS-receiver interfaces : Serial interfaces with RS 422 hardware


or RS 232 or RS 485

11. Cabling : All required cabling for the connection


of antenna, preamplifier and receiver
and of the GPS system to the HMI
center unit, must be included in the
supply. Furthermore the cables must be
described in great detail in the offer.

12. The length of cable between antenna


and receiver : ~ 100 m

XII. 20KV BAYS (IF THE EHV SUBSTATION INCLUDES A 150/20KV


SUBSTATION)

a. Multifunctional relays (IEDs) with protection, control and monitoring


capabilities are to be installed inside the metalclad 20kV panels for the
transmission of 20kV bays required commands, signals and measurements to
and from HMI/DCC and they will be included in the supply. The metalclad
20kV panels are not included in the supply of the offered S.A.S.

- 24 -
b. It is noted that the provided IEDs of the 20kV bays will be capable of the
following:
i. Transmission of all indications, alarms and analog signals to and commands
from HMI/DCC, within Ethernet port (FOC) by IEC-61850 communication
protocol, in accordance with the attached Tables 1, 2, 3 of this hereby
technical description.
ii. Control of the corresponding 20kV bay equipment with embedded
appropriate control switches and mimic diagram.
iii. Digital inputs (DI) for the indications and alarms transfer from the 20kV
equipment or auxiliary equipment of the panel, according to the
corresponding attached Tables.
In case that IEDs will receive commands from not embedded control
switches, additional digital inputs will be provided.
iv. Digital outputs (DO) for the commands transfer from the 20kV equipment or
auxiliary equipment of the panel as well as for the transmission of signals
derived from the IED’s protection functions operation.
v. The functions of IEDs will be in accordance with the relevant technical
descriptions, as follows:

1. OLM panel: One (1) IED with functions according to the technical
description TD-50 and also with a number of Digital Inputs DI=18 and
Digital outputs DO=11, in total.
2. TM panel: One (1) IED with functions according to the technical
description TD-51 and also with a number of Digital Inputs DI=11 and
Digital outputs DO=7, in total.
Also one (1) IED with protection functions according to specification
SS-100 and also with a number of Digital Inputs DI=6 and Digital
outputs DO=4, in total
3. CM panel: One (1) three-phase IED with functions according to the
technical description TD-41 and also with a number of Digital Inputs
DI=17 and Digital outputs DO=6, in total.
Three (3) single-phase IEDs with protection functions according to the
technical description TD-40 and also with a number of Digital Inputs
DI=4 and Digital outputs DO=4, in total
4. ULM panel: One (1) IED with functions according to the technical
description TD-51 and also with a number of Digital Inputs DI=16 and
Digital outputs DO=9, in total.
5. BSM panel: One (1) IED with functions according to the technical
description TD-51 and also with a number of Digital Inputs DI=13 and
Digital outputs DO=4, in total.
6. IPPM panel:
- For underground 20kV feeder bay
One (1) IED with functions according to the technical description TD-
51 and also with a number of Digital Inputs DI=16 and Digital outputs
DO=9, in total.
- For overhead 20kV feeder bay
One (1) IED with functions according to the technical description TD-
50 and also with a number of Digital Inputs DI= 18 and Digital outputs
DO=11, in total.

- 25 -
c. Characteristics of the signals of alarms, measurements and commands

1. For 20kV analog measurement signals

• Voltage : 100V AC
• Current : 5A

2. For digital (binary) control and alarm signals

• Voltage : 110V DC

d. Supply voltage : 110V DC

e. Ambient temperature during operation : -5 oC to +50 oC

XIII. FIBER OPTIC CABLES

a. The fiber optic cables which will be used to connect bay control units with the
HMI center will be about 400 m long (the exact length will be derived from the
ehv substation’s layout drawings) and shall consist of glass fibre.

b. The fiber optic cables which will be used to connect bay control units with
protection relays with distances up to 3-6 m will be glass fibre. In the case
which the protections relays are connected directly to the HMI center with a
distance of about 400m long, the connection shall be with glass fibre.

c. The fiber optic cable which will be used to connect bus-bar differential relays to
the HMI center will be about 50 meters long and will consist of glass fibre.

d. If the structure of the substation automation system is of a double loop, this loop
shall be of glass fibre.

e. The glass fiber optic cables shall be equipped with rodent protection.

f. Temperature range withstand of the glass fiber optic cables shall be as follows:

• In service : -25oC to 70oC


• In storage : -40oC to 70oC

g. Fibers in all other aspects will be as per IEC 60794-1 and IEC 60794-2

- 26 -
XIV. COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS AND OTHER COMMUNICATIONS.

The following protocols are acceptable for the communications within the ehv
substation and also for the communication of the substation automation system
(S.A.S) with the system’s control centers.

1. Between bay level control units and HMI center, the acceptable communication
protocol is IEC-61850.

2. Between distribution’s system control center and this substation automation


system, the only acceptable protocol is the following:

• IEC 60870-5-101 with minimum transmission speed of 19,2kbits/sec


• and the conventional way which is described in paragraph XVI.

3. Between transmission’s system (network) control center and this substation


automation system the only acceptable protocol is the following:

• IEC 60870-5-101 with minimum transmission speed of 19,2kbits/sec


• and the conventional way which is described in paragraph XVI.

4. Between protection relays and HMI center, the communication protocol is


IEC-61850

5. Between bay level control units and protection relays the acceptable protocol is
IEC-61850

6. Between HMI center and IEDs of 20KV bays, the acceptable protocol is
IEC-61850

7. The minimum transmission speed for IEC 60870-5-101 protocol, shall be


19,2kbits/sec

8. Security of the system


Because the IEC-61850 protocol is based on a Ethernet platform, sufficient
security measures, must be provided, that is beyond passwords, in order to
prevent unauthorized access.

XV. CERTIFICATION
The offered system and its devices shall be certified by conformance test performed in
accordance with IEC 61850-10. The certificate must be of level A (level A means
independent Lab., e.g. KEMA).
The certificate can be of level B (manufacturer’s Lab) if the manufacturer’s Lab has
been qualified by the UCA International Users Group.
In the first case the certificate (level A) must be submitted along with technical offer.
In the second case the certificate (level B), along with the UCA International Users
Group certification to the manufacturer must be submitted in the technical offer.

- 27 -
XVI. COMMUNICATION OF THE SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM
WITH THE TRANSMISSION’S SYSTEM CONTROL CENTER WITH
CONVENTIONAL MEANS

Because the transmission’s system control center is not capable yet to communicate
via IEC-60870-5-101 protocol, a panel must be provided with an IEC-60870-5-101
protocol converter system. The inputs (events and alarms) to the protocol converter
system will be from the substation automation system (IEC-60870-5-101) and the
outputs will either be from free contacts suitable for 48V DC or digital signals of 48V
DC. The commands which originate from the transmission’s system control center
will be received by the protocol convert system in the form of free contacts. The
required auxiliary relays of 48V DC (coil voltage) for the commands will be part of
the supply.
This panel, besides the IEC-60870-5-101 protocol converter system, must contain and
the following:
a. Terminal blocks and miniature circuit breakers.
b. The converter system must accommodate the signals mentioned in previous
paragraphs and which are included at the attached Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4 of this
thereby technical description.
c. The transducers for the conversion of the analog measurements from the
substation automation system to current signals of -20….+20mA.

XVII. COMMUNICATION OF THE SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM


WITH THE DISTRIBUTION’S SYSTEM CONTROL CENTER WITH
CONVENTIONAL MEANS

Because the distribution’s system control center is not capable to communicate via
IEC-60870-5-101 protocol, a panel must be provided with an IEC-60870-5-101
protocol converter. The inputs (events and alarms) to the protocol converter system
will be from the substation automation system (IEC-60870-5-101) and the outputs
will either be from free contacts suitable for 24V DC or digital signals of 24V DC.
The commands which originate from the distribution’s system control center will be
received by the protocol convert system in the form of free contacts. The required
auxiliary relays of 24V DC (coil voltage) for the commands will be part of the supply.

This panel, besides the IEC-60870-5-101 protocol converter system, must contain and
the following:
a. Terminal blocks and miniature circuit breakers.
b. The converter system must accommodate the signals mentioned in previous
paragraphs and which are included at the attached Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4 of this
thereby technical description.
c. The transducers for the conversion of the analog measurements from the
substation automation system to current signals of -5….+5mA.

- 28 -
XVIII. SOFTWARE
Any software needed for the configuration setting, parameterizing, documentation
and displaying of the system or of the devices which is composed of (bay control
units, protection relays, bus bar differential protection relays and GPS) shall be
professional “windows” based and shall be provided on the basis of a royalty free,
non-exclusive with irrevocable license to use by PPC.
Software for the analysis of fault data shall also be provided with the same terms as
above.

XIX. TESTS
The following routine and type tests concern the bay control units.
Only one (1) routine test concerns the panels of the system.
The tests required for the protection relays are specified in the relative specifications.

1. Routine tests
a. Power frequency voltage test as per
IEC-60255-5 : 2KV, 5Hz, 1minute

b. Power frequency voltage test as per


IEC-60439-1 (for panels only) : 2KV for auxiliary circuits of rated
voltage ≤300V, and 2,5 KV for
auxiliary circuits of rated voltage of
≥300V. The test shall be applied
between live parts and the frame for 1 sec.

2. Type Tests
a. Impulse voltage test as per IEC-60255-5,
all circuits, class III : 5KV peak, 1.2 / 50 µs, 0.5 J,
3 positive and 3 negative shots at
intervals of 5 sec.

b. High frequency test as per


IEC-60255-22-1, class III : 2.5 KV peak, 1MHz, t = 15µs, 400
shots / sec, duration = 2 sec

c. Electrostatic discharge test as per


IEC-60255-22-2, class III : 8KV air discharge
4 KV contact discharge,
both polarities

d. Fast Transients test as per


IEC-60255-22-4, Class III : 2KV, 5/50ns, 5 KHz, burst length =
15ms, repetition rate = 300ms, both
polarities

e. Vibration Tests as per IEC-60068-2-6 : 60Hz to 150 Hz, 0.5 g acceleration,


sweep rate = 10 octaves / min, 20
cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.

- 29 -
f. Radiated electromagnetic field
disturbance test as per
IEC-60255-22-3 class III : 10V/m, 27 to 500MHz

g. Radio interference field strength


as per IEC-CISPR 22 : 30 to 100MHz limit class B

3. Acceptance Test
This concerns the entire system after its installation, and shall be performed in
accordance with the supplier’s standard in the presence of T/NPRD personnel.

XX. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS OF THE


SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR THE EHV SUBSTATION

1. All wording appearing on the VDU with regard the single line diagrams of the ehv
substation shall be in Greek language.

2. Care shall be taken so that the system can be expanded in the future, if needed.

3. The database, after it has been created, will be delivered on CD-ROMs.

4. Due to IEC-61850 communication protocol implementation, the following should be


applied:

4.1 For all “functions” within the substation, an object oriented data model will be
provided grouping the data into the smallest possible independent functions named
Logical Nodes (LN). Entire functionality of S.A.S split into LNs.
The LNs and all data attributes contained therein will be named according to
standardised “semantic”. The Substation Configuration Language used to configure
the S.A.S and individual IEDs is the SCL language.
4.2 Complete S.A.S will be formally documented within SCL especially through SCD
(Substation Configuration Description) files.
The SCD files will ensure that all system engineering work has been recorded for
re-use in future adaptations, extensions and refurbishment of the S.A.S. The SCD
files is part of the documentation that PPC will receive with the delivery of the
System.

XXI. COMMISSIONING
The commissioning of the system shall be carried out by the supplier of the system,
therefore the cost of the commissioning of the system must be included in the economic
offer.

XXII. TRAINING
1. In the scope of supply, a training of at least six (6) PPC engineers shall be included.
Training shall take place at the facilities of the supplier for at least seven (7) days and

- 30 -
shall include but not limited to the following.
a. System parameterization
b. System configuration
c. System documentation
d. Test run of the system (to the extend that it is possible)

2. In addition along with entire system, two (2) Laptops must be supplied with he
following characteristics:
Pentium IV : 2,5MHz
Hard Disk : 40GB at least
Central unit : 512MB
Screen cart : VCA, 64MB
Network cart : 10/100
Modem cart : 56K
Drive : DVD/RW
Drive : FD/3,5”
Screen :15” TFT with resolution 1024X768pixels/75Hz pixels
The above laptops must be loaded with all parameterizing, setting and documentation
programs of the substation automation system, protections relays and GPS system.

XXIII. TERMS OF PAYMENT

With the delivery of all system components and providing that all schematic and wiring
drawings of the system have been submitted and approved by PPC, a payment order
will be issued to the amount of 70% of the worth of the delivered system. An additional
20% of the total of the delivered system will be paid after the precommissioning of the
system and the remaining 10% of the worth of the system will be paid after he final
commissioning and acceptance testing of the system. The time between delivery of the
system and final commissioning can be from three (3) months to eight (8) months.

XXIV. INFORMATION WHICH MUST BE PROVIDED BY ALL BIDDERS

All bidders are required, in their technical offer, to provide the following:

1. Detail technical prospectus describing the offered system.

2. Point by point description of the system offered against this hereby technical
description.

3. Point by point compliance, differences or any deviations from this hereby technical
description must be clearly indicated.

4. A drawing with the structure (configuration) of the offered system and with all
communication protocols indicated on it.

5. Failure to comply with requirements of 2, 3 and 4 above, will result in rejection of the
offer.

- 31 -
In other words, a technical offer comprised of some technical brochures and generalities
without addressing all technical points raised by this hereby technical description will
be rejected.

6. Outline drawings with over-all dimensions and wiring drawings of all the system’s
devices.

7. Any available test certificates for all specified type tests in this hereby technical
description may be submitted along with the technical offer.
Acceptance or not of the submitted test certificates will be subject to the purchaser’s
approval.

8. A reference list for the offered system shall be submitted and in which the following
shall be included:
− Country and buyer
− Number of systems sold
− Year of sale.

XXV. DATA WHICH MUST BE PROVIDED BY THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER

1. All necessary documentation concerning installation of the system, commissioning,


operation and maintenance

2. Complete outline and wiring drawings (four (4) copies of each drawing) for all the
equipment of the system and the system itself, for approval before the shipment of the
entire system.

XXVI. METHOD OF INSTALLATION AND DELIVERY OF BAY CONTROL


UNITS, PROTECTION RELAYS, BUSBAR DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS HMI
EQUIPMENT AND OF THE PANELS OF CONVENTIONAL
COMMUNICATION

1. The HMI equipment mentioned in paragraph IX-6g shall be placed on a separate panel.
2. Each panel for 400KV transmission line bays shall contain, besides other equipment,
the following:
a. Two (2) digital distance protection relays of the same manufacturer but with
different settings and algorithms, as per SS-108.
b. One (1) bay control unit
c. Furthermore, one (1) of the panels for the 400KV transmission line bays shall
include one (1) bay control unit for the bus section bay. This panel will be
designated during the implementation of the contract.
3. Each panel for the 400KV line bays of power plants shall contain, besides other
equipment, the following:
a. One (1) numerical phase and earth overcurrent protection relay, as per TD-31B
technical description.
b. One (1) bay control unit

- 32 -
4. Each panel for the 400KV autotransformer bays shall contain, besides other equipment,
the following:
a. One (1) autotransformer differential protection relay as per SS-68
b. Three (3), 3-phase and earth fault overcurrent relays that will be connected with
the corresponding voltage transformers of the 400KV, 150KV and 30KV
autotransformer bushings, as per TD-48
c. One (1) single phase overcurrent mass protection relay as per TD-49
d. One (1) voltage regulation relay
e. One (1) bay control unit
5. Each panel for 400KV bus coupler shall contain, besides other equipment, the
following:
a. One (1) bay control unit
6. Each panel for the 150 KV transmission line bays shall contain, besides other
equipment, the following:
a. One (1) distance protection relay as per TD-16
b. One (1) directional and earth(ground) overcurrent relay as per SS-131
c. One (1) bay control unit
d. Furthermore, one (1) of the panels for the 150KV transmission line bays shall
include a bay control unit which, however, shall not have control functions on it.
It will be used for indication purposes only and for transmitting the required
signals to the HMI center (e.g. for indications of manually operated
disconnectors' status for the manually operated 150KV bus section bay). That
panel will be designated during the implementation of the contract.
7. Each panel for the 150KV autotransformer bays shall contain, besides other equipment,
the following :
a. One (1) distance protection relay without automatic reclosing as per TD-16
b. One (1) bay control unit
8. Each panel for the 150KV capacitor bays (if required) shall contain, besides other
equipment, the following:
a. One (1) bay control unit
b. Three (3) current unbalance relays as per TD-38
c. One (1) Numerical overcurrent plus overload relay in accordance with TD-37
d. One (1) voltage relay as per TD-39
9. Each panel for the 150KV bus coupler bays shall contain, besides other equipment, the
following:
a. One bay control unit
10. Each panel for the 150KV power unit line bays shall contain, besides other equipment,
the following:

- 33 -
a. One (1) numerical phase and earth overcurrent protection relay, as per TD-31B
technical description.
b. One (1) bay control unit
11. Εach panel for the 30KV autotransformer bay shall contain, besides other equipment,
the following:
a. One (1) 3-phase and earth fault overcurrent relay as per TD-48 that will be
connected to the current transformers of the 30KV shunt reactor bushings.

b. One (1) voltage relay supplied from VTs connected in broken delta for the
protection of 30KV, 50MVAR shunt reactors against earth faults as per TD-52

c. One (1) voltage relay supplied from single – phase VT, located in the neutral of
a 30KV, 50MVAR shunt reactor for the detection of overvoltage conditions as
per TD-46.

d. One (1) bay control unit

12. Each panel for the (150/20KV) transformer bay (if required) shall contain, besides other
equipment, the following:
a. One (1) transformer differential protection relay as per SS-100
b. One (1) phase earth overcurrent relay, as per TD-31B technical description
c. One (1) definite time overcurrent relay suitable for the detection of small earth
fault currents, as per specification SS-94
d. One (1) bay control unit

13. The 400KV and 150KV busbar differential protection systems as per SS-55 will be
installed:
a. In uniform panels if the protection systems are of centralized structure, the number
of panels to be determined by the supplier depending on the system offered.
All panels for the above system will be located inside the corresponding bus
coupler bay relay kiosk.
b. If the protection system is of distributed structure, the peripheral units will be
installed in the protection panel inside the relay kiosk of the corresponding bay and
the central unit inside the corresponding bus coupler relay kiosk.

14. Each communication panel for the conventional communication with the transmission’s
system control center shall contain all equipment described in paragraph XVI.

15. Each communication panel for the conventional communication with the distribution’s
system control center (if applicable) shall contain all equipment described in paragraph
XVI.

16. By this term <<other equipment >> is mentioned basically the following: microcircuit
breakers, auxiliary relays, terminal blocks etc.

- 34 -
17. All fiber optic cables necessary for the connection of bay control units, protection relays
to the HMI center and also the 20KV IEDs to HMI center must be supplied.
18. All panels shall be equipped with 25% spare terminals blocks which will be used for the
wiring of signals and commands from the outdoor primary equipment.
In the wiring drawings the points of the terminal blocks on where the signals or
commands are to be wired, shall be clearly indicated.
All terminal blocks shall be suitable for conductors of 8mm2 in cross section.
19. All panels, which shall bear protection relays, shall be equipped with test sockets
(current, voltage and trip circuits) used for the testing of relays. A number of the
corresponding male plugs must also be supplied. The test sockets shall be the same with
regard the design and function as those of ENTRELEC make.
It should be noted that test terminal blocks are not acceptable.
20. All incoming voltage feeds for each panel must be run through voltage sockets of type
omega (Ω) for isolation purposes.
21. All panels of the system must be wired with 1.5mm2 control cables and all control
cables must be equipped with copper strip of 0.1mm2 in thickness and must also bear
protection against rodents.
22. All panels which are to be provided for the entire system shall be of the IP52 protection
class as per IEC-60529.
23. All panels of the system must bear doors of plexiglass.
24. The protection and control panels of the 400KV and 150KV bays, will be installed
inside the relay kiosks of the corresponding bays.
The protection and control panels of the 30KV bays, will be installed inside the relay
kiosks of the corresponding 400KV bays.
The 20KV metal-clad panels (not included in the supply), will be located inside the
control building of the ehv substation

XXVII. COLOURS OF THE MIMIC DIAGRAMS WHICH APPEAR ON THE VDUs


OF THE HMI.

The colours used for the mimic diagrams appearing on the VDUs (screens) of the HMI
shall be as follows:
1. 400KV Buses and Equipment : Green colour
2. 150KV Buses and Equipment : Red colour
3. 20KV Buses and Equipment : Black colour
4. 30KV Buses and Equipment : Blue colour
5. 380V AC Buses and Equipment : Orange colour
6. 220V AC Buses and Equipment : Brown colour
7. 220V DC Buses and Equipment : Purple colour
8. 110V DC Buses and Equipment : White colour
9. Earthing (grounding) : Yellow colour
10. Equipment status : In accordance with IEC 60073, latest revision
11. VDU background colour : Light Grey / Blue colour

- 35 -
XXVIII. PACKING

All panels, covered with nylon, shall be packed inside robust wooden boxes.
VDUs, PCs, printer, UPS, GPS antenna and its accessories, fiber optic cables and any
other components of the system shall all be packed separately inside robust boxes and
each box besides been labelled properly, it shall bear indication as to what it contains.

- 36 -
APPENDIX

TABLE 1 : CONTROL

TABLE 2 : INDICATIONS

TABLE 3 : ALARMS

TABLE 4 : MEASUREMENTS

- 37 -
TABLE 1 : CONTROL

CONTENTS

400KV OVERHEAD T.L (*) BAY TABLE 1.1

400 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR INTERNATIONAL LINKS TABLE 1.2

400 KV BAY FOR CONNECTION WITH POWER PLANT TABLE 1.3

400 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 1.4

400 KV BUS COUPLER BAY - BUS SECTION BAY TABLE 1.5

150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY TABLE 1.6

150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR POWER PLANT TABLE 1.7

150 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 1.8

150 KV TRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 1.9

150 KV BUS COUPLER BAY TABLE 1.10

30 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 1.11

20 KV TRANSFORMER INCOMING BAY (TM panel)

20 KV OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND FEEDER BAY (OLM or ULM panel)

20 KV BUS COUPLER BAY (BSM panel) TABLE 1.12

20 KV CAPACITORS BANKS BAY (CM panel)

20 KV FEEDER BAY FOR INDEPENDENT PRODUCER (IPPM)

(*) T.L: Transmission Line

- 38 -
TABLE 1.1

EHV
400KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY TCC**
Substation

C.B 400 KV -opening C.B ● ●

C.B 400 KV – C.B selection (for closing) ●

C.B 400 KV – cancellation of C.B selection ● *


C.B 400 KV – closing of selected C.B ● ● *
Auto-reclosing 1 – ON (only for overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

Auto-reclosing 1 - OFF (only for overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

Auto-reclosing 2 - ON (only for overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

Auto-reclosing 2 - OFF (only for overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

400 KV D.S. (***) of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV T.L. - opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV T.L. - closing ● ●

Note

* common command for all Circuit Breakers (C.Bs)


** TCC :Transmission Control Center
***D.S.: Disconnector

- 39 -
TABLE 1.2

EHV
400 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR INTERNATIONAL LINKS TCC
Substation

C.B 400 KV -opening C.B ● ●

C.B 400 KV – C.B selection (for closing) ●

C.B 400 KV – cancellation of C.B selection ● *


C.B 400 KV – closing of selected C.B ● ● *
Auto-reclosing 1 – ON ● ●

Auto-reclosing 1 - OFF ● ●

Auto-reclosing 2 - ON ● ●

Auto-reclosing 2 - OFF ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV T.L. - opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV T.L. - closing ● ●

Note

* common command for all C.Bs

- 40 -
TABLE 1.3

400 KV BAY FOR CONNECTION WITH POWER PLANT EHV Power


TCC
(overhead) Substation plant

C.B 400 KV -opening C.B ●

C.B 400 KV – closing C.B ●

C.B 400 KV - emergency opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - opening ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - closing ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV T.L. - opening ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV T.L. - closing ●

TABLE 1.4

EHV
400 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TCC
Substation

C.B 400 KV -opening C.B ● ●

C.B 400 KV – closing C.B ● ●

C.B 400 KV, C.B 150 KV, C.B 30 KV of the same autotransformer bay ● ●
emergency opening (common command)

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - closing ● ●

- 41 -
TABLE 1.5
EHV
400 KV BUS COUPLER BAY - BUS SECTION BAY TCC
Substation
C.B 400 KV (Ρ805) -opening C.B ● ●
C.B 400 KV (Ρ805) – C.B selection (for closing) ●

C.B 400 KV (Ρ805) – cancellation of C.B selection ● *


C.B 400 KV (Ρ805) – closing of selected C.B ● ● *
D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (806)- opening ● ●
D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (806)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (807)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (807)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (809)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (809)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (808)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (808)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (Γ1806)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (Γ1806)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (Γ5806)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (Γ5806)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (Γ1809)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (Γ1809)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (Γ5809)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (Γ5809)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (Γ808)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (Γ808)-closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 1, (906)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 1, (906)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (907)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (907)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 3, (908)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 3, (908)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 1, (Γ1906)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 1, (Γ1906)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 1, (Γ2906)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 1, (Γ2906)- closing ● ●

- 42 -
TABLE 1.5 (continues)

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (Γ1907)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (Γ1907)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (Γ2907)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (Γ2907)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (Γ1908)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (Γ1908)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (Γ2908)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (Γ2908)- closing ● ●

Note

* common command for all C.Bs

TABLE 1.6

150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY EHV Substation TCC

C.B 150 KV -opening C.B ● ●

C.B 150 KV – C.B selection (for closing) ●

C.B 150 KV – cancellation of C.B selection ● *


C.B 150 KV – closing of selected C.B ● ● *
Auto-reclosing – ON (only for overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

Auto-reclosing - OFF (only for overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

Note

* common command for all C.Bs

- 43 -
TABLE 1.7

EHV Power
150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR POWER PLANT TCC
Substation plant

C.B 150 KV -opening selected C.B ●

C.B 150 KV -closing selected C.B ●

C.B 150 KV - emergency opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

D.S. of T.L. 150 KV - opening ●

D.S. of T.L. 150 KV - closing ●

Earthing switch of 150 KV Bus D.S. - opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 150 KV Bus D.S. - closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 150 KV T.L. - opening ●

Earthing switch of 150 KV T.L. - closing ●

- 44 -
TABLE 1.8
EHV
150 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TCC
Substation

C.B 150 KV -opening C.B ● ●

C.B 150 KV – C.B selection (for closing) ●

C.B 150 KV – cancellation of C.B selection ● *


C.B 150 KV – closing of selected C.B ● ● *
150 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

On Load Tap Changer on "emergency stop" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer : "increase of voltage step" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer : "decrease of voltage step" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "Automatic" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "Manual" ● ●

Note
* common command for all C.Bs

- 45 -
TABLE 1.9
EHV
150 KV TRANSFORMER BAY TCC DCC
Substation
C.B 150 KV -opening C.B ● ●
C.B 150 KV – C.B selection (for closing) ●

C.B 150 KV – cancellation of C.B selection ●

C.B 150 KV – closing of selected C.B ● ●

C.B 150 KV - emergency opening ●

D.S. 150 KV of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

D.S. 150 KV of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

D.S. 150 KV of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

D.S. 150 KV of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

D.S. 150 KV of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

D.S. 150 KV of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

On Load Tap Changer on "emergency stop" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer : "increase of voltage step" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer : "decrease of voltage step" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "Automatic" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "Manual" ● ●

TABLE 1.10
EHV
150 KV BUS COUPLER BAY TCC
Substation

C.B 150 KV (P5)-opening C.B ● ●

C.B 150 KV (P5)– C.B selection (for closing) ●

C.B 150 KV (P5)– cancellation of C.B selection ● *


C.B 150 KV (P5)– closing of selected C.B ● ● *
D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (6)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (6)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (7)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (7)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (9)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (9)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (8)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (8)- closing ● ●

Note

* common command for all C.Bs

- 46 -
TABLE 1.11

EHV
30 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TCC
Substation

C.B 30 KV - opening C.B ● ●

C.B 30 KV – closing C.B ● ●

30 / 0,4 KV SERVICE TRANSFORMER

On Load Tap Changer on "emergency stop" ●

On Load Tap Changer : "increase of voltage step" ●

On Load Tap Changer : "decrease of voltage step" ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "Automatic" ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "Manual" ●

TABLE 1.12

20 KV TRANSFORMER INCOMING BAY (TM panel) PANEL HMI / DCC

C.B 20 KV - opening C.B ● ●

C.B 20 KV – closing C.B ● ●

"reset" command of auxiliary relay Κ11 ● ●

"reset" command of auxiliary relay Κ30ΧΒ ● ●

Panel in "remote" control ● ●

Panel in "local" control ● (●)

20 KV OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND FEEDER BAY (OLM or


PANEL HMI / DCC
ULM panel)

C.B 20 KV - opening ● ●

C.B 20 KV – closing ● ●

● ●
Overcurrent instantaneous elements ON
● ●
Overcurrent instantaneous elements OFF
● ●
CB auto-reclosing operation - ON (only for overhead T.L. feeder bay)
● ●
CB auto-reclosing operation - OFF (only for overhead T.L. feeder bay)
● ●
Panel in "remote" control

Panel in "local" control ● (●)

- 47 -
20 KV BUS COUPLER BAY (BSM panel) PANEL HMI / DCC

C.B 20 KV - opening ● ●

C.B 20 KV – closing ● ●

Panel in "remote" control ● ●

Panel in "local" control ● (●)

PANEL / DCC
20 KV CAPACITORS BANKS BAY (CM panel) TCC
HMI (* )

C.B 20 KV - opening ● ● (●)

C.B 20 KV – closing ● ● (●)

Capacitor Switch of first capacitor bank 4,3 MVAR - "opening" ● ● (●)

Capacitor Switch of first capacitor bank 4,3 MVAR - "closing" ● ● (●)

Capacitor Switch of second capacitor bank 4,3 MVAR - "opening" ● ● (●)

Capacitor Switch of second capacitor bank 4,3 MVAR - "closing" ● ● (●)

Capacitor Switch of third capacitor bank 4,3 MVAR - "opening" ● ● (●)

Capacitor Switch of third capacitor bank 4,3 MVAR - "closing" ● ● (●)

Panel in "remote" control ● ● (●)

Panel in "local" control ● (●) (●)

For every protection relay of 20 kV bays or transformers, it is required that after operation of its ''reset"
command, the corresponding telecontrol will be ensured.
(*)& (●) Will be designated during the implementation of the contract

TCC or DCC
20 KV FEEDER BAY FOR INDEPENDENT PRODUCER (IPPM) PANEL / HMI
(* )

C.B 20 KV - opening ● ●

C.B 20 KV – closing ● ●

Overcurrent instantaneous elements ON ● (●)

Overcurrent instantaneous elements OFF ● (●)

CB auto-reclosing operation - ON (only for overhead T.L. feeder bay) ● (●)

CB auto-reclosing operation - OFF (only for overhead T.L. feeder bay) ● (●)

Panel in "remote" control ● ●

Panel in "local" control ● (●)

(*) & (●) Will be designated during the implementation of the contract

- 48 -
TABLE 2 : INDICATIONS

CONTENTS

400KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY TABLE 2.1

400 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR INTERNATIONAL LINKS TABLE 2.2

400 KV BAY FOR CONNECTION WITH POWER PLANT TABLE 2.3

400 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 2.4

400 KV BUS COUPLER BAY, BUS SECTION BAY TABLE 2.5

150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY TABLE 2.6

150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR POWER PLANT TABLE 2.7

150 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 2.8

150 KV TRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 2.9

150 KV BUS COUPLER BAY-BUS SECTION BAY TABLE 2.10

30 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 2.11

20 KV TRANSFORMER INCOMING BAY (TM panel)

20 KV OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND FEEDER BAY (OLM or ULM panel)

TABLE 2.12
20 KV BUS COUPLER BAY (BSM panel)

20 KV CAPACITORS BANKS BAY (CM panel)

20 KV FEEDER BAY FOR INDEPENDENT PRODUCER (IPPM)

- 49 -
TABLE 2.1

EHV
400KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY TCC
SUBSTATION

Bay controlled by "ehv substation" ● ●

Bay controlled by "TCC" ● ●

C.B. 400 KV "selected for control" ●

C.B. 400 KV "not selected for control" ●

C.B. 400 KV "C.B. selection command" ● (1)

C.B. 400 KV "cancellation of C.B. selection command" ● (1)

C.B. 400 KV "C.B. closing command (synchro-check operation)" ● (1)


C.B. 400 KV "failure of C.B. closing command (synchro-check
● (1)
operation)"

C.B 400 KV -open ● ●

C.B 400 KV –closed ● ●

Auto-reclosing 1 – ON (overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

Auto-reclosing 1 - OFF (overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

Auto-reclosing 2 - ON (overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

Auto-reclosing 2 - OFF (overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV T.L. – opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV T.L. – closing ● ●

Note

(1) Common command for all C.Bs

- 50 -
TABLE 2.2
EHV
400 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR INTERNATIONAL LINKS TCC
SUBSTATION

Bay controlled by "ehv substation" ● ●

Bay controlled by "TCC" ● ●

C.B. 400 KV "selected for control" ●

C.B. 400 KV "not selected for control" ●

C.B. 400 KV " C.B. selection command" ● (1)

C.B. 400 KV "cancellation of C.B.selection command" ● (1)

C.B. 400 KV "C.B. closing command (synchro-check operation)" ● (1)


C.B. 400 KV "failure of C.B. closing command (synchro-check
● (1)
operation)"

C.B 400 KV – open ● ●

C.B 400 KV – closed ● ●

Auto-reclosing 1 – ON (overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

Auto-reclosing 1 – OFF (overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

Auto-reclosing 2 – ON (overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

Auto-reclosing 2 – OFF (overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV T.L. - opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV T.L. - closing ● ●

Note

(1) Common command for all C.Bs

- 51 -
TABLE 2.3
EHV POWER
400 KV BAY FOR CONNECTION WITH POWER PLANT TCC PLANT
SUBSTATION
Bay controlled by "ehv substation" ● ●
Bay controlled by "TCC" ● ●

C.B 400 KV – open ● ● ●

C.B 400 KV – closed ● ● ●



C.B. 150 KV "opening command: emergency ON"

C.B. 150 KV "closing command: emergency OFF"
400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - opening ● ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV T.L. - closing ● ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - opening ● ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - closing ● ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV T.L. - opening ● ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV T.L. - closing ● ● ●

TABLE 2.4

400 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY ΠΥΛΗ EHV SUBSTATION TCC

Bay controlled by "ehv substation" ● ●


Bay controlled by "TCC" ● ●

C.B 400 KV – open ● ●

C.B 400 KV – closed ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

400 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector. - opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Disconnector - closing ● ●

- 52 -
TABLE 2.5

EHV
400 KV BUS COUPLER BAY - BUS SECTION BAY TCC
SUBSTATION

Bay controlled by "ehv substation" ● ●

Bay controlled by "TCC" ● ●

C.B. 400 KV (Ρ805) "selected for control" ●

C.B. 400 KV (Ρ805) "not selected for control" ●

C.B. 400 KV " C.B selection command" ● (1)

C.B. 400 KV "cancellation of C.B selection command" ● (1)

C.B. 400 KV (Ρ805) "C.B. closing command (synchro-check operation)" ● (1)

C.B. 400 KV "failure of C.B. closing command (synchro-check operation)" ● (1)

C.B 400 KV (Ρ805) – open ● ●

C.B 400 KV (Ρ805) – closed ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (806)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (806)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (807)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (807)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (809)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (809)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (808)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (808)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (Γ1806)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (Γ1806)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (Γ5806)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (Γ5806)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (Γ1809)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (Γ1809)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (Γ5809)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (Γ5809)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (Γ808)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (Γ808)-closing ● ●

- 53 -
TABLE 2.5 (continues)

EHV
400 KV BUS COUPLER BAY - BUS SECTION BAY TCC
SUBSTATION

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 1, (906)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 1, (906)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (907)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (907)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 3, (908)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 3, (908)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 1, (Γ1906)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 1, (Γ1906)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 1, (Γ2906)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 1, (Γ2906)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (Γ1907)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (Γ1907)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (Γ2907)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 2, (Γ2907)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 3, (Γ1908)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 3, (Γ1908)- closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 3, (Γ2908)- opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 400 KV Bus Section - Bus 3, (Γ2908)- closing ● ●

Note

(1) Common command for all C.Bs

- 54 -
TABLE 2.6

EHV
150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY TCC
SUBSTATION

Bay controlled by "ehv substation" ● ●

Bay controlled by "TCC" ● ●

C.B. 150 KV "selected for control" ●

C.B. 150 KV "not selected for control" ●

C.B. 150 KV "C.B. selection command" ● (1)

C.B. 150 KV "C.B. cancellation of selection command" ● (1)

C.B. 150 KV "C.B. closing command (synchro-check operation)" ● (1)


C.B. 150 KV "failure of C.B. closing command (synchro-check
● (1)
operation)"

C.B 150 KV – open ● ●

C.B 150 KV – closed ● ●

Auto-reclosing – ON (overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

Auto-reclosing - OFF (overhead T.L. bay) ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV T.L. – opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV T.L. – closing ● ●


Earthing switch of 150 KV T.L. – opening ● ●
Earthing switch of 150 KV T.L. – closing ● ●

Note

(1) Common command for all C.Bs

- 55 -
TABLE 2.7

EHV Power
150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR POWER PLANT TCC
SUBSTATION Plant
Bay controlled by "ehv substation" ● ●

Bay controlled by "TCC" ● ●

C.B 150 KV – open ● ● ●

C.B 150 KV – closed ● ● ●



C.B. 150 KV "opening command: emergency ON"

C.B. 150 KV "opening command: emergency OFF"

150 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV T.L. - opening ● ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV T.L - closing ● ● ●

Earthing switch of 150 KV Bus D.S. - opening ● ● ●

Earthing switch of 150 KV Bus D.S. - closing ● ● ●

Earthing switch of 150 KV T.L. - opening ● ● ●

Earthing switch of 150 KV T.L. - closing ● ● ●

- 56 -
TABLE 2.8
EHV
150 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TCC
SUBSTATION
Bay controlled by "ehv substation" ● ●

Bay controlled by "TCC" ● ●

C.B. 150 KV "selected for control" ●

C.B. 150 KV "not selected for control" ●

C.B. 150 KV "C.B. selection command" ● (1)

C.B. 150 KV "cancellation of C.B. selection command" ● (1)

C.B. 150 KV "C.B. closing command (synchro-check operation)" ● (1)

C.B. 150 KV "failure of C.B. closing command (synchro-check operation)" ● (1)

C.B 150 KV – open ● ●

C.B 150 KV – closed ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

150 KV D.S. of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV T.L. – opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV T.L. – closing ● ●

Earthing switch of 150 KV T.L. – opening ● ●

Earthing switch of 150 KV T.L. – closing ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "local control" ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "EHV Substation" ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "Automatic" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "Manual" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "emergency stop" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "voltage step " (25 steps) ● ● (2)

On Load Tap Changer on upper tap ● ●

On Load Tap Changer on lower tap ● ●

Note

(1) Common command for all C.Bs

(2) Analog signals

- 57 -
TABLE 2.9

EHV
150 KV TRANSFORMER BAY (TM panel) TCC DCC
SUBSTATION

Bay controlled by "ehv substation" ● ● ●

Bay controlled by "TCC-DCC" ● ● ●

C.B. 150 KV "selected for control" ●

C.B. 150 KV "not selected for control" ●

C.B. 150 KV "opening command: emergency ON" ●

C.B. 150 KV "opening command: emergency OFF" ●

C.B 150 KV – open ● ● ●

C.B 150 KV – closed ● ● ●

D.S. 150 KV of Bus 1 - opening ● ●

D.S. 150 KV of Bus 1 - closing ● ●

D.S. 150 KV of Bus 2 - opening ● ●

D.S. 150 KV of Bus 2 - closing ● ●

D.S. 150 KV of Bus 3 - opening ● ●

D.S. 150 KV of Bus 3 - closing ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "local control" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "EHV Substation" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "Automatic" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "Manual" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "emergency stop" ● ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "voltage step " (25 steps) ● ●

On Load Tap Changer on upper tap ● ●

On Load Tap Changer on lower tap ● ●

- 58 -
TABLE 2.10

EHV
150 KV BUS COUPLER BAY TCC
SUBSTATION
Bay controlled by "ehv substation" ● ●

Bay controlled by "TCC" ● ●

C.B. 150 KV "selected for control" ●

C.B. 150 KV "not selected for control" ●

C.B. 150 KV "C.B. selection command" ● (1)

C.B. 150 KV "cancellation of C.B. selection command" ● (1)

C.B. 150 KV "C.B. closing command (synchro-check operation)" ● (1)


C.B. 150 KV "failure of C.B. closing command (synchro-check
● (1)
operation)"

C.B 150 KV – open ● ●

C.B 150 KV – closed ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (6)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (6)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (7)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (7)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (9)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (9)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (8)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (8)- closing ● ●

EHV
150 KV BUS SECTION BAY TCC
SUBSTATION

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (166)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 1, (166)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (167)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 2, (167)- closing ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (168)- opening ● ●

D.S. of 150 KV Bus Coupler - Bus 3, (168)- closing ● ●

Note

(1) Common command for all C.Bs

- 59 -
TABLE 2.11

EHV
30 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TCC
SUBSTATION

Bay controlled by "ehv substation" ● ●

Bay controlled by "TCC" ● ●

C.B 30 KV – open ● ●

C.B 30 KV – closed ● ●

D.S 30 KV – open ● ●

D.S 30 KV – closed ● ●

30 / 0,4 KV SERVICE TRANSFORMER

On Load Tap Changer - control on "local control" ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "EHV Substation" ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "Automatic" ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "Manual" ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "emergency stop" ●

On Load Tap Changer - control on "voltage step " (25 steps) ●

On Load Tap Changer on upper tap ●

On Load Tap Changer on lower tap ●

- 60 -
TABLE 2.12

20 KV TRANSFORMER INCOMING BAY (TM panel) PANEL HMI / DCC

Panel in "local" control ● ●

Panel in "remote" control ● ●

C.B 20 KV - opening ● ●

C.B 20 KV – closing ● ●

Earthing switch - opening ● ●

Earthing switch - closing ● ●

C.B trolley "operating position" ● ●

C.B trolley "isolating position" ● ●

20 KV OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND FEEDER BAY (OLM or


PANEL HMI / DCC
ULM panel)

Panel in "local" control ● ●

Panel in "remote" control ● ●

C.B 20 KV - opening ● ●

C.B 20 KV – closing ● ●

Earthing switch - opening ● ●

Earthing switch - closing ● ●

C.B trolley "operating position" ● ●

C.B trolley " isolation position " ● ●

Instantaneous elements of overcurrent relay - ON ● ●

Instantaneous elements of overcurrent relay - OFF ● ●

Auto-reclosing operation of overcurrent relay - ON (only for overhead ● ●


20 KV feeder bays)
Auto-reclosing operation of overcurrent relay - OFF (only for overhead ● ●
20 KV feeder bays)

20 KV BUS COUPLER BAY (BSM panel) PANEL HMI / DCC

Panel in "local" control ● ●

Panel in "remote" control ● ●

C.B 20 KV – opening ● ●

C.B 20 KV – closing ● ●

C.B trolley "operating position" ● ●

C.B trolley "isolating position" ● ●

- 61 -
PANEL / DCC
20 KV CAPACITORS BANKS BAY (CM panel) TCC
HMI (*)

Panel in "local" control (CM) ● ● (●)

Panel in "remote" control (CM) ● ● (●)

C.B 20 KV - opening ● ● (●)

C.B 20 KV – closing ● ● (●)

Earthing switch – open ● ● (●)

Earthing switch - closed ● ● (●)

C.B trolley "operating position" ● ● (●)

C.B trolley "isolating position" ● ● (●)

4,3 MVAR 1rst capacitors bank - "opening" (QC) ● ● (●)

4,3 MVAR 1rst capacitors bank - "closing" (QC) ● ● (●)

4,3 MVAR 2nd capacitors bank - "opening" (QC) ● ● (●)

4,3 MVAR 2nd capacitors bank - "closing" (QC) ● ● (●)

4,3 MVAR 3rd capacitors bank - "opening" (QC) ● ● (●)

4,3 MVAR 3rd capacitors bank - "closing" (QC) ● ● (●)

(*) & (●) Will be designated during the implementation of the contract

PANEL / TCC or DCC


20 KV FEEDER BAY FOR INDEPENDENT PRODUCER (IPPM)
HMI (* )

Panel in "local" control ● ●

Panel in "remote" control ● ●

C.B 20 KV - opening ● ●

C.B 20 KV – closing ● ●

Earthing switch - opening ● ●

Earthing switch - closing ● ●

C.B trolley "operating position" ● ●

C.B trolley " isolation position " ● ●

Instantaneous elements of overcurrent relay - ON ● (●)

Instantaneous elements of overcurrent relay - OFF ● (●)

Auto-reclosing operation of overcurrent relay - ON (only for overhead ● (●)


20 KV feeder bays)
Auto-reclosing operation of overcurrent relay - OFF (only for ● (●)
overhead 20 KV feeder bays)
(*) & (●) Will be designated during the implementation of the contract

- 62 -
TABLE 3 : ALARMS

CONTENTS

GENERAL ALARMS OF EHV SUBSTATION - ACOUSTIC TABLE 3.1

GENERAL ALARMS OF EHV SUBSTATION - VISUAL TABLE 3.2

400KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY TABLE 3.3

400 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR INTERNATIONAL LINKS TABLE 3.4

400 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR POWER PLANT TABLE 3.5

400 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 3.6

400 KV BUS COUPLER BAY TABLE 3.7

150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY TABLE 3.8

150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR POWER PLANT TABLE 3.9

150 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 3.10

150 KV TRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 3.11

150 KV BUS COUPLER BAY TABLE 3.12

30 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 3.13

20 KV TRANSFORMER INCOMING BAY (TM panel) TABLE 3.14

OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND 20 KV FEEDER BAY (OLM or ULM panel)


TABLE 3.15
20 KV FEEDER BAY FOR INDEPENDENT PRODUCER (IPPM)

20 KV CAPACITORS BANKS BAY (CM panel) TABLE 3.16

20 KV BUS COUPLER BAY (BSM panel) TABLE 3.17

- 63 -
TABLE 3.1

EHV
GENERAL ALARMS OF EHV SUBSTATION - ACOUSTIC
SUBSTATION
110V DC panels – DC supply loss 
110V DC panels – DC supply loss for general alarms (supervising will be
performed by the use of auxiliary A.C. relays that will excite an AC alarm bell) 
220V DC panels – DC supply loss 
220V DC panels – DC supply loss for general alarms (supervising will be
performed by the use of auxiliary A.C. relays that will excite an AC alarm bell) 
AC panels. AC supply loss. Supervising per phase (supervising will be
performed by the use of auxiliary DC relays that will excite an DC alarm bell) 
EHV substation entrance bell 
Alarm Ι - excitation of the substation control building security system 
Alarm ΙΙ - excitation of the substation control building fire detection system 

- 64 -
TABLE 3.2
EHV
GENERAL ALARMS OF EHV SUBSTATION - VISUAL TCC DCC
SUBSTATION

400 ΚV SIDE
Synchro-check voltage comparison scheme: "Live line"-"live
bus"  
Synchro-check voltage comparison scheme: "Dead line"-"live
bus"  
Synchro-check voltage comparison scheme: "Live line"-"dead
bus"  
Synchro-check voltage comparison scheme: "Dead line"-"dead
bus"  
Synchro-check operation failure (due to) – "voltage magnitude
difference"  
Synchro-check operation failure (due to) – "frequency difference"  
Synchro-check operation failure (due to) – "phase difference"  
400KV bus-bars differential protection – blocking  
400KV bus-bars differential protection – excitation  
400KV bus-bars differential protection – one (1) trip alarm per
zone 
400KV bus-bars differential protection – overall trip alarm  
150 KV SIDE
Synchro-check voltage comparison scheme: "Live line"-"live
bus"  
Synchro-check voltage comparison scheme: "Dead line"-"live
bus"  
Synchro-check voltage comparison scheme: "Live line"-"dead
bus"  
Synchro-check voltage comparison scheme: "Dead line"-"dead
bus"  
Synchro-check operation failure (due to) – "voltage magnitude
difference"  
Synchro-check operation failure (due to) – "frequency difference"  
Synchro-check operation failure (due to) – "phase difference"  
150KV bus-bars differential protection – blocking  
150KV bus-bars differential protection – excitation  
150KV bus-bars differential protection – one (1) trip alarm per
zone 
150KV bus-bars differential protection – overall trip alarm  
220V D.C. SUPPLY NETWORK
Battery charger 1 of 220V batteries – overvoltage / undervoltage
at the output 
Battery charger 1 of 220V batteries – malfunction / damage  
Battery charger 2 (back-up) of 220V batteries – overvoltage /
undervoltage at the output 

- 65 -
EHV
220V D.C. SUPPLY NETWORK (continues) SUBSTATION
TCC DCC
Battery charger 2 (back-up) of 220V batteries – malfunction /
damage  
Battery charger of 48V batteries – malfunction / damage  
For every 220V DC supply panel
Supervision relay of DC current leakage  
DC supply loss at the panel’s busbars (supervising by auxiliary
undervoltage relay) 
DC supply loss of general alarms (supervising by auxiliary AC
relay)  
Trip of panel’s supply auto-circuit breaker (*) 
For every 220V DC supply
Tripping of auto-C.B. for power line carrier (400KV side) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. for central control unit 
Tripping of auto-C.B. for PC display 
Tripping of auto-C.B. for 400 KV busbars differential protection 
Tripping of auto-C.B. for transmission SCADA interface 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 1, for protection and control D.C. loop (±1) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 1, for protection and control D.C. loop (±2) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 1, for D.S motors D.C. loop (±Ι) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 1, for alarms D.C. loop (±3) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 1, for interlockings 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 2, for protection and control D.C. loop (±1) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 2, for protection and control D.C. loop (±2) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 2, for D.S motors D.C. loop (±Ι) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 2, for alarms D.C. loop (±3) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 2, for interlockings 
Tripping of auto-C.B. for general signals 
Collectively (one common signal for similar supplies)

DC supply loss at the panel’s busbars (supervising by aux


undervoltage relay) 
DC current leakage supervising relay 
Tripping of auto-C.B. for central control unit 
Tripping of auto-C.B. for 400 KV busbars differential protection 
Tripping of auto-C.B. for transmission SCADA interface 

(*)auto-circuit breaker : auto-C.B.

- 66 -
TABLE 3.2 (continues)

EHV
110V D.C. SUPPLY NETWORK SUBSTATION
TCC DCC
Battery charger 1 of 110V batteries – overvoltage / undervoltage
at the output 
Battery charger 1 of 110V batteries – malfunction / damage  
Battery charger 2 (back-up) of 110V batteries – overvoltage /
undervoltage at the output 
Battery charger 2 (back-up) of 110V batteries – malfunction /
damage  
For every 110V DC supply panel

Supervision relay of DC current leakage  


DC supply loss at the panel’s bus-bars (supervising by auxiliary
undervoltage relay) 
DC supply loss for general alarms (supervising by auxiliary AC
relay)  
Trip of panel’s supply auto-C.B. 
For every 110V DC supply

Tripping of auto-C.B. for power line carrier (150KV side) 


Tripping of auto-C.B. for 150 KV busbars differential protection 
Tripping of auto-C.B. for Distribution SCADA interface 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 1, for protection and control D.C. loop (±Q) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 1, for D.S motors D.C. loop (±Ι) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 1, for alarms D.C. loop (±S) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 1, for interlockings 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 2, for protection and control D.C loop (±QL) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 2, for D.S motors D.C. loop (±Ι) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 2, for alarms D.C. loop (±SL) 
Tripping of auto-C.B. 2, for interlockings 
Tripping of auto-C.B. for general signals 
Collectively (one common signal for similar supplies)

DC supply loss at the panel’s busbars (supervising by aux


undervoltage relay)  
DC current leakage supervising relay  
Tripping of auto-C.B. for 150 KV busbars differential protection  
Tripping of auto-C.B. for Distribution transmission SCADA
interface 

- 67 -
TABLE 3.2 (continues)
EHV
A.C. SUPPLY NETWORK TCC DCC
SUBSTATION

Autochangeover 400/230V AC supply system - "Manual control" 


Autochangeover 400/230V AC supply system - "Automatic
control" 
Autochangeover 400/230V AC supply system - "OFF" 
Autochangeover 400/230V AC supply system - "Incoming
supply 1" 
Autochangeover 400/230V AC supply system - " Incoming
supply 2" 
Autochangeover 400/230V AC supply system - " Incoming
supply 3" 
400/230V AC network – phase A loss at the panel’s busbar
(supervising by aux undervoltage relay) 
400/230V AC network – phase B loss at the panel’s busbar
(supervising by aux undervoltage relay) 
400/230V AC network – phase C loss at the panel’s busbar
(supervising by aux undervoltage relay) 
400/230V AC panel – S/S (*) – Tripping of auto-C.B. for panel’s
supply  
400/230V AC panel –S/S–phase A loss at the panel’s busbar
(supervising by aux undervoltage relay)  
400/230V AC panel –S/S–phase B loss at the panel’s busbar
(supervising by aux undervoltage relay)  
400/230V AC panel –S/S–phase C loss at the panel’s busbar
(supervising by aux undervoltage relay)  
400/230V AC panel –S/S– Autochangeover power supply circuit
breaker - "Service transformer Νο 1"  
400/230V AC panel –S/S– Autochangeover power supply circuit
breaker - "Service transformer Νο 2"  
400/230V AC panel –S/S– Autochangeover power supply circuit
breaker -"ΟFF" 
Diesel power supply unit – “start”  
Diesel power supply unit – “failure”  
OTHER GENERAL ALARMS
Central substation entrance door - "open"   
Fire fighting tank level 
Fire detection panel – system malfunction or lack of system
supply voltage 
Fire detection panel – fire detection “ON”   
Building security system alarm – “ON”   
Water supply tank (floater) – “Low level” 
Transformer oil collection tank (floater) – “High level” 
Autotransformer oil collection tank (floater) – High level 

(*) S/S : Substation

- 68 -
TABLE 3.3
EHV
400KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY TCC
SUBSTATION
400 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure – level 1  
400 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 2 
400 KV C.B. – spring uncharged  
Distance protection relay 1 - malfunction  
Distance protection relay 1 - excitation of phase Α 
Distance protection relay 1 - excitation of phase B 
Distance protection relay 1 - excitation of phase C 
Distance protection relay 1 – general excitation 
Distance protection relay 1 – trip command to C.B of the bay  
Distance protection relay 1 – fault detection at zone 1  
Distance protection relay 1 - fault detection at zone 2  
Distance protection relay 1 - fault detection at zone 3  
Distance protection relay 1 - fault detection backward  
Distance protection relay 1 – remote trip command via power line
carrier, from the C.B. of the S/S connecting at the opposite end of the
Transmission line  
Distance protection relay 1 – autoreclosing blocked  
Distance protection relay 2 - malfunction  
Distance protection relay 2 - excitation of phase Α 
Distance protection relay 2 - excitation of phase B 
Distance protection relay 2 - excitation of phase C 
Distance protection relay 2 - general excitation 
Distance protection relay 2 – trip command to C.B of the bay  
Distance protection relay 2 – fault detection at zone 1  
Distance protection relay 2 - fault detection at zone 2  
Distance protection relay 2 - fault detection at zone 3  
Distance protection relay 2 - fault detection backward  
Distance protection relay 2 – remote trip command via power line
carrier, from the C.B. of the S/S connecting at the opposite end of the
Transmission line  
Distance protection relay 2 – autoreclosing blocked  
400kV busbar differential protection relay - trip 
mcb (*) of transmission line voltage control for distance protection
relay - trip  
mcb of transmission line voltage control for synchro-check - trip 
mcb of busbar voltage control for synchro-check - trip 

(*) mcb : miniature circuit breaker

- 69 -
TABLE 3.3 (continues)

400KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY EHV


(continues) SUBSTATION TCC
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
control and protection (+01) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
control and protection (+02) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
control and protection (+12) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
alarms (+03) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
interlockings (+04) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for D.S
motors (+) 
DC supply loss for operation, control, protection and alarms of the bay 

- 70 -
TABLE 3.4
EHV
400 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR INTERNATIONAL LINKS
SUBSTATION TCC
400 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 1  
400 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 2 
400 KV C.B. – spring uncharged  
Distance protection relay 1 - malfunction  
Distance protection relay 1 - excitation of phase Α 
Distance protection relay 1 - excitation of phase B 
Distance protection relay 1 - excitation of phase C 
Distance protection relay 1 – general excitation 
Distance protection relay 1 – trip command to C.B of the bay  
Distance protection relay 1 – fault detection at zone 1  
Distance protection relay 1 - fault detection at zone 2  
Distance protection relay 1 - fault detection at zone 3  
Distance protection relay 1 - fault detection backward  
Distance protection relay 1 – remote trip command via power line carrier,
from the C.B. of the S/S connecting at the opposite end of the T.L.  
Distance protection relay 1 – autoreclosing blocked  
Distance protection relay 2 - malfunction  
Distance protection relay 2 - excitation of phase Α 
Distance protection relay 2 - excitation of phase B 
Distance protection relay 2 - excitation of phase C 
Distance protection relay 2 - general excitation 
Distance protection relay 2 – trip command to C.B of the bay  
Distance protection relay 2 – fault detection at zone 1  
Distance protection relay 2 - fault detection at zone 2  
Distance protection relay 2 - fault detection at zone 3  
Distance protection relay 2 - fault detection backward  
Distance protection relay 2 – remote trip command via power line carrier,
from the C.B. of the S/S connecting at the opposite end of the T.L.  
Distance protection relay 2 – autoreclosing blocked  
400kV busbar differential protection relay - trip 
mcb of transmission line voltage control for distance protection relay - trip  
mcb of transmission line voltage control for synchro-check - trip 
mcb of busbar voltage control for synchro-check - trip 

- 71 -
TABLE 3.4 (continues)

400 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR INTERNATIONAL LINKS EHV


SUBSTATION TCC
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for control
and protection (+01) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for control
and protection (+02) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for control
and protection (+12) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for alarms
(+03) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
interlockings (+04) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for D.S
motors (+) 
DC supply loss for operation, control, protection and alarms of the bay 

- 72 -
TABLE 3.5

EHV POWER
400 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR POWER PLANT TCC PLANT
SUBSTATION

400 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 1  


400 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 2  
400 KV C.B. – spring uncharged  
Overcurrent protection relay - malfunction  
Overcurrent protection relay - alarm  
Overcurrent protection relay – trip command to C.B of the bay   
400kV busbar differential protection relay - trip  
Generators protection relays - trip   
mcb of T.L voltage control for synchro-check - trip  
mcb of busbar voltage control for synchro-check - trip  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb
for control and protection (+01)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb
for control and protection (+02)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb
for control and protection (+12)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb
for alarms (+03)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb
for interlockings (+04)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb
for D.S motors (+)  
DC supply loss for operation, control, protection and alarms of
the bay 

Alarms of protection units which are to be sent to the Power Plant, as well as alarms of the Power Plant
protection units to EHV Substation, will be designated during the stage of studies submission.

- 73 -
TABLE 3.6

EHV
400 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TCC
SUBSTATION
400 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 1  
400 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 2 
400 KV C.B. – spring uncharged  
Overcurrent protection relay - malfunction  (3)
Overcurrent protection relay - alarm  
Overcurrent protection relay - trip  
Bus-bar differential protection relay - trip 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
control and protection (+01) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
control and protection (+02) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
control and protection (+12) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
alarms (+03) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
interlockings (+04) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
D.S motors (+) 
DC supply loss for operation, control, protection and alarms of the
bay 
Autotransformer’s alarms

Autotransformer – cooling system malfunction (one per group) 


Autotransformer – pressure relief device - trip  (5)
Autotransformer – oil pumps malfunction 
Autotransformer - loss of D.C. control voltage 
Autotransformer - OLTC - protection relay malfunction  (3)
Autotransformer - Buchholz relay - alarm  (1)
Autotransformer – OLTC Buchholz relay - alarm  (1)
Autotransformer – oil temperature - alarm  (2)
Autotransformer - winding (H2) temperature - alarm  (2)
Autotransformer - winding (Y2) temperature - alarm  (2)
Autotransformer - winding (X2) temperature - alarm  (2)

- 74 -
TABLE 3.6 (continues)

EHV
400 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY (continues) TCC
SUBSTATION
Autotransformer – oil low level - alarm  (2)
Autotransformer - OLTC oil low level - alarm  (2)
Autotransformer - oil high level - alarm  (2)
Autotransformer - OLTC oil high level - alarm  (2)
Autotransformer – Buchholz relay - trip  (4)
Autotransformer – OLTC Buchholz relay - trip  (4)
Autotransformer – oil temperature - trip  (5)
Autotransformer - winding (H2) temperature - trip  (5)
Autotransformer - winding (Y2) temperature - trip  (5)
Autotransformer - winding (X2) temperature - trip  (5)
Autotransformer - pressure relief valve - trip  (5)
Autotransformer – deferential protection relay - malfunction  (3)
Autotransformer – deferential protection relay - excitation  
Autotransformer – deferential protection relay - trip  
Autotransformer – mass protection relay - malfunction  (3)
Autotransformer – mass protection relay – excitation  
Autotransformer – mass protection relay - trip  
Activation of fire extinguishing system  
Note :
(x) Alarms to TCC, having the same numbering will be a common signal

- 75 -
TABLE 3.7

EHV
400 KV BUS COUPLER BAY TCC
SUBSTATION

400 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 1  


400 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 2 
400 KV C.B. – spring uncharged  
400 KV busbar differential protection relay - trip 
mcb of busbar 1 voltage control for synchro-check - trip 
mcb of busbar 2 voltage control for synchro-check - trip 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for control
and protection (+01) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for control
and protection (+02) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for control
and protection (+12) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for alarms
(+03) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
interlockings (+04) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for D.S
motors (+) 
DC supply loss for operation, control, protection and alarms of the bay 

- 76 -
TABLE 3.8
EHV
150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY TCC
SUBSTATION

150 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 1  


150 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 2 
150 KV C.B. – spring uncharged  
Distance protection relay - malfunction  (1)
Distance protection relay - excitation of phase Α 
Distance protection relay - excitation of phase B 
Distance protection relay - excitation of phase C 
Distance protection relay – general excitation 
Distance protection relay – trip command to C.B of the bay  
Distance protection relay – fault detection at zone 1  
Distance protection relay - fault detection at zone 2  
Distance protection relay - fault detection at zone 3  
Distance protection relay - fault detection backward  
Distance protection relay – remote trip command via power line carrier,
from the C.B. of the Substation connecting at the opposite end of the  
Transmission line
Distance protection relay – autoreclosing blocked  
Overcurrent protection relay - malfunction  (1)
Overcurrent protection relay – excitation  
Overcurrent protection relay - trip  
mcb of transmission line voltage control for distance protection relay -
trip  
mcb of transmission line voltage control for synchro-check - trip 
mcb of busbar voltage control for synchro-check - trip 
Busbar differential protection relay - trip 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
control and protection (+QL) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
alarms (+SL) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
interlockings (+04) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for D.S
motors (+) 
DC supply loss for operation, control, protection and alarms of the bay 

Note :
(x) Alarms to TCC, having the same numbering will be a common signal

- 77 -
TABLE 3.9

EHV POWER
150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR POWER PLANT TCC PLANT
SUBSTATION

150 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 1  


150 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 2  
150 KV C.B. – spring uncharged  
Overcurrent protection relay - malfunction  
Overcurrent protection relay - excitation  
Overcurrent protection relay – trip command to C.B of the bay   
mcb of T.L voltage control for synchro-check - trip  
mcb of busbar voltage control for synchro-check - trip  
Busbar differential protection relay - trip  
Generators protection relays - trip   
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb
for control and protection (+QL)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb
for alarms (+SL)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb
for interlockings (+04)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb
for D.S motors (+)  
DC supply loss for operation, control, protection and alarms of
the bay 

Alarms of protection units which are to be sent to the Power Plant, as well as alarms of the Power Plant
protection units to EHV Substation, will be designated during the stage of studies submission.

- 78 -
TABLE 3.10

EHV
150 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TCC
SUBSTATION
150 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 1  
150 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 2 
150 KV C.B. – spring uncharged  
Distance protection relay - malfunction  (1)
Distance protection relay - excitation of phase Α 
Distance protection relay - excitation of phase B 
Distance protection relay - excitation of phase C 
Distance protection relay – general excitation 
Distance protection relay – trip command to C.B of the bay  
Distance protection relay – fault detection at zone 1  
Distance protection relay - fault detection at zone 2  
Distance protection relay - fault detection at zone 3  
Distance protection relay - fault detection backward  
Overcurrent protection relay - malfunction  (1)
Overcurrent protection relay - excitation  
Overcurrent protection relay – trip command to C.B of the bay  
mcb of transmission line voltage control for distance protection relay -
trip  
mcb of T.L voltage control for synchro-check - trip 
mcb of busbar voltage control for synchro-check - trip 
Busbar differential protection relay - trip 
Cable protection relay (if applicable) - trip  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
control and protection (+QL) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
alarms (+SL) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
interlockings (+04) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for D.S
motors (+) 
DC supply loss for operation, control, protection and alarms of the bay 

Note :
(x) Alarms to TCC, having the same numbering will be a common signal

- 79 -
TABLE 3.11

EHV
150 KV TRANSFORMER BAY DCC
SUBSTATION
150 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 1  
150 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 2  
150 KV C.B. – spring uncharged  
Busbar differential protection relay - trip  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for control
and protection (+QL)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for alarms
(+SL)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
interlockings (+04)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for D.S
motors (+)  
Transformer – Buchholz relay - alarm  
Transformer – OLTC Buchholz relay - alarm  
Transformer – oil temperature - alarm  
Transformer - winding (Χ1) temperature - alarm  
Transformer - winding (Χ3) temperature - alarm  
Transformer – oil low level - alarm  
Transformer – OLTC oil low level - alarm  
Overcurrent protection relay of transformer neutral - malfunction  
Transformer neutral - overcurrent protection relay – alarm due to earth
fault  
Transformer neutral earthing resistance – high temperature alarm
 
Transformer – trip from Buchholz relay to the bay C.B.  
Transformer – trip from OLTC Buchholz relay to the bay C.B.  
Transformer – trip due to oil temperature to the bay C.B.  

Transformer – trip due to winding (X1) temperature to the bay C.B.  

Transformer – trip due to winding (X3) temperature to the bay C.B.  

- 80 -
TABLE 3.11 (continues)

EHV
150 KV TRANSFORMER BAY (continues) DCC
SUBSTATION

Transformer – trip due to the pressure relief valve operation  


Transformer – differential protection relay - malfunction  
Transformer – differential protection relay - excitation  
Transformer –differential protection relay – trip  
Transformer – mcb for fans control - trip  
110V D.C bay supply panel – trip of D.C. supply auto-circuit breaker for
20kV C.B control (+Q)  
110V D.C bay supply panel – trip of D.C. supply auto-circuit breaker for
20kV C.B alarms (+S)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for 20kV
C.B control (+QB)  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for 20kV
C.B alarms (+SB)  

TABLE 3.12

EHV
150 KV BUS COUPLER BAY TCC
SUBSTATION
150 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 1  
150 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 2 
150 KV C.B. – spring uncharged  
Busbar differential protection relay - trip 
mcb of busbar 1 voltage control for synchro-check - trip 
mcb of busbar 2 voltage control for synchro-check - trip 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for control
and protection (+QL) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for alarms
(+SL) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for
interlockings (+04) 
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for D.S
motors (+) 
DC supply loss for operation, control, protection and alarms of the bay 

- 81 -
TABLE 3.13

EHV
30 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TCC
SUBSTATION
30 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 1  
30 KV C.B. - low SF6 pressure - level 2 
30 KV C.B. – spring uncharged  (1)
30 KV C.B. – motor protection  (1)
Autotransformer – overcurrent protection relay - excitation 
Autotransformer – overcurrent protection relay – trip alarm  
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for control
and protection (+ 01)  (2)
Protection and control panel of the bay – trip of DC supply mcb for alarms
(+03)  (2)
Reactor – trip from Buchholz relay to the bay C.B.  
Reactor – reactor’s own protections (BUCHHOLZ, GASS)  
Reactor - oil temperature - alarm  
Reactor – trip due to oil temperature to the bay C.B.  
Reactor – neutral voltage transformer  
Reactor – oil level (min)  
Reactor – thermostat - alarm  
Reactor – overcurrent protection relay - alarm  
Reactor - overcurrent protection relay - trip  
30KV voltage transformer –unbalance protection relay  

Note :
Alarms to TCC, having the same numbering (x) will be a common signal

- 82 -
TABLE 3.14

20 KV SIDE – GENERAL ALARMS PANEL HMI / DCC

Control of all 20KV bays by "ehv substation"  


Control of all 20KV bays by "DCC"  
Alarm that the 20kV bus coupler C.B. and the two 20kV C.B. of the
incoming transformer bay, on both sides of the coupler, are all
simultaneously closed for a time greater than a certain threshold, which  
will be an adjustable parameter of the system software

20 KV TRANSFORMER INCOMING BAY (TM panel) PANEL HMI / DCC

ΤΜ panel – Loss of transformer output voltage  


ΤΜ panel - low SF6 pressure - level 1  
ΤΜ panel – low SF6 pressure - level 2  
ΤΜ panel – C.B. closing spring uncharged  
ΤΜ panel - 20 KV incoming cable - live  
ΤΜ panel – overcurrent protection relay - failure  
ΤΜ panel – transformer differential protection relay - failure  
ΤΜ panel –arc detection relay - malfunction  
ΤΜ panel – arc detection relay – trip to the C.B. of the bay  
ΤΜ panel –overcurrent (phase) protection– trip to the C.B. of the bay  
ΤΜ panel –overcurrent (earth) protection– trip to the C.B. of the bay  
ΤΜ panel –transformer differential protection– trip to the C.B. of the bay  
ΤΜ panel – trip of DC supply mcb for bay control  
ΤΜ panel – trip of DC supply mcb for bay protection  
ΤΜ panel – trip of DC supply mcb for bay alarms  
Κ30ΧΒ auxiliary relay (ON)  
Κ30ΧΒ auxiliary relay (OFF)  
C.B. opening or closing - malfunction  

- 83 -
TABLE 3.15

OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND 20 KV FEEDER BAY (OLM or ULM


PANEL HMI / DCC
panel)

OLM or ULM panel - low SF6 pressure - level 1  


OLM or ULM panel – low SF6 pressure - level 2  
OLM or ULM panel – C.B. closing spring uncharged  
OLM or ULM panel - 20 KV incoming cable - live  
OLM or ULM panel – overcurrent protection relay - failure  
OLM or ULM panel – arc detection relay – trip to the C.B. of the bay  
OLM or ULM panel – instantaneous elements of overcurrent (phase)
protection– trip to the C.B. of the bay  
OLM or ULM panel – time elements of overcurrent (phase) protection– trip
to the C.B. of the bay  
OLM or ULM panel – instantaneous elements of overcurrent (earth)
protection– trip to the C.B. of the bay  
OLM or ULM panel – time elements of overcurrent (earth) protection– trip
to the C.B. of the bay  

OLM or ULM panel – trip of DC supply mcb for bay control  

OLM or ULM panel – trip of DC supply mcb for bay protection  

OLM or ULM panel – trip of DC supply mcb for bay alarms  


C.B. opening or closing - malfunction  
Sensitive ground fault current detection relay - ON  

- 84 -
TABLE 3.15 (continues)
PANEL TCC or
20 KV FEEDER BAY FOR INDEPENDENT PRODUCER (IPPM)
/ΗΜΙ DCC (*)

IPPM panel - low SF6 pressure - level 1   (1)


IPPM panel - low SF6 pressure - level 2   (1)
IPPM panel - C.B. closing spring uncharged   (1)
IPPM panel - 20 KV incoming cable - live  () (4)
IPPM panel - overcurrent protection relay - failure  () (4)
IPPM panel - arc detection relay – trip to the C.B. of the bay   (2)
IPPM panel - instantaneous elements of overcurrent (phase) protection–
trip to the C.B. of the bay   (2)
IPPM panel - time elements of overcurrent (phase) protection– trip to the
C.B. of the bay   (2)
IPPM panel - instantaneous elements of overcurrent (earth) protection– trip
to the C.B. of the bay   (2)
IPPM panel - time elements of overcurrent (earth) protection– trip to the
C.B. of the bay   (2)

IPPM panel - trip of DC supply mcb for bay control   (3)

IPPM panel - trip of DC supply mcb for bay protection  () (3)

IPPM panel - trip of DC supply mcb for bay alarms  () (3)
C.B. opening or closing - malfunction  () (1)

Note :
Alarms to TCC, having the same numbering (x) will be a common signal
(*) & (●) Will be designated during the implementation of the contract

- 85 -
TABLE 3.16
PANEL/
20 KV CAPACITORS BANKS BAY (CM panel)
HMI
TCC DCC (*)
CM panel - low SF6 pressure - level 1   ()
CM panel - low SF6 pressure - level 2   ()
CM panel - C.B. spring uncharged   ()
CM panel - 20 KV incoming cable - live   ()
CM panel - overcurrent protection relay - failure   ()
CM panel – arc detection relay - failure   ()
CM panel - unbalance protection relay - failure   ()
CM panel - arc detection relay – trip to the C.B. of the bay   ()
CM panel - instantaneous elements of overcurrent (phase)
protection– trip to the C.B. of the bay
CM panel - time elements of overcurrent (phase) protection– trip to
  ()
the C.B. of the bay
CM panel - instantaneous elements of overcurrent (earth)
protection– trip to the C.B. of the bay
CM panel - time elements of overcurrent (earth) protection– trip to
  ()
the C.B. of the bay
st
CM panel – instantaneous elements of overcurrent protection of 1
capacitor bank neutral – trip to the C.B. of the bay   ()
st
CM panel – time elements of overcurrent protection of 1 capacitor
bank neutral – trip to the C.B. of the bay   ()
CM panel – instantaneous elements of overcurrent protection of
nd
2 capacitor bank neutral – trip to the C.B. of the bay   ()
nd
CM panel – time elements of overcurrent protection of 2
capacitor bank neutral – trip to the C.B. of the bay   ()
rd
CM panel – instantaneous elements of overcurrent protection of 3
capacitor bank neutral – trip to the C.B. of the bay   ()
rd
CM panel – time elements of overcurrent protection of 3 capacitor
bank neutral – trip to the C.B. of the bay   ()
CM panel - trip of DC supply mcb for bay control   ()
CM panel - trip of DC supply mcb for bay protection   ()
CM panel - trip of DC supply mcb for bay alarm   ()
st
Loss of 1 capacitor bank (4,3 Μvar)   ()
nd
Loss of 2 capacitor bank (4,3 Μvar)   ()
rd
Loss of 3 capacitor bank (4,3 Μvar)   ()
20kV C.B. opening or closing - malfunction   ()

- 86 -
TABLE 3.16 (continues)

20 KV CAPACITORS BANKS BAY (CM panel)


(continues) PANEL(*) HMI TCC DCC (*)

SCC control unit of capacitor banks - malfunction ()   ()


Auto control of capacitor banks ()   ()
Confirmation for manual operation of capacitor
banks ()   ()
Permission for manual control ()   ()
Remote control of capacitor banks ()   ()
Note:
(*) & (●) Will be designated during the implementation of the contract

TABLE 3.17

20 KV BUS COUPLER BAY (BSM panel) PANEL HMI/ DCC

ΒSM panel - low SF6 pressure - level 1  


ΒSM panel - low SF6 pressure - level 2  
ΒSM panel - C.B. closing spring uncharged  
ΒSM panel – arc detection relay - failure  
ΒSM panel – arc detection relay – trip to the C.B. of the bay  
ΒSM panel – trip of DC supply mcb for bay control  

ΒSM panel – trip of DC supply mcb for bay protection  

ΒSM panel – trip of DC supply mcb for bay alarms  

From TM panel overcurrent protection relay – trip of C.B  

C.B. opening or closing - malfunction  

TM and BSM panel C.Bs simultaneously closed for over 5min  

- 87 -
TABLE 4 : MEASUREMENTS

CONTENTS

110V OR 220V DC PANELS (for each panel)

400/230V AC PANEL - SUBSTATION TABLE 4.1

400/230V AC AUTOMATIC CHANGEOVER PANEL – EHV SUBSTATION

400KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY

400 KV BAY FOR CONNECTION WITH POWER PLANT

400 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR INTERNATIONAL LINKS TABLE 4.2

400 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY

400 KV BUS COUPLER BAY

150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY

150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR POWER PLANT

150 KV TRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 4.3

150 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY

150 KV BUS COUPLER BAY

30 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TABLE 4.4

20 KV TRANSFORMER INCOMING BAY (TM panel)

20 KV OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND FEEDER BAY (OLM or ULM panel)

TABLE 4.5
20 KV BUS COUPLER BAY (BSM panel)

20 KV CAPACITORS BANKS BAY (CM panel)

20 KV FEEDER BAY FOR INDEPENDENT PRODUCER (IPPM)

- 88 -
TABLE 4.1

EHV
110V DC PANELS (for each panel) TCC DCC
SUBSTATION

Current ●

Voltage ●

EHV
220V DC PANELS (for each panel) TCC DCC
SUBSTATION

Current ●

Voltage ●

EHV
400/230V AC PANEL - SUBSTATION TCC DCC
SUBSTATION

Current ●

Voltage ●

Energy ●

400/230V AC AUTOMATIC CHANGEOVER PANEL EHV


TCC DCC
– EHV SUBSTATION SUBSTATION

Current (for each input) ●

Voltage (for each input) ●

Energy (for each input) ●

- 89 -
TABLE 4.2
EHV POWER
400KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY TCC
SUBSTATION PLANT

Current of three phases ● ●


Voltage of three phases (the 3 phase and 3 polar voltages
● ● (1)
are presented)
● ●
Active power (3ph)
Reactive power (3ph) ● ●
400 KV BAY FOR CONNECTION WITH POWER EHV POWER
TCC
PLANT SUBSTATION PLANT
Current of three phases ● ● (2)
Voltage of three phases (the 3 phase and 3 polar voltages
● ● (1)
are presented) (2)

Active power (3ph) ● ● (2)

Reactive power (3ph) ● ● (2)

Active energy (3ph) ● (2)

Reactive energy (3ph) ● (2)


400 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR INTERNATIONAL EHV POWER
TCC
LINKS SUBSTATION PLANT

Current of three phases ● ●


Voltage of three phases (the 3 phase and 3 polar voltages
● ● (1)
are presented)
Active power (3ph) ● ●

Reactive power (3ph) ● ●

Active energy (3ph) ● ●

Reactive energy (3ph) ●


EHV POWER
400 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TCC
SUBSTATION PLANT
Current of three phases ● ●
Active power (3ph) ● ●
Reactive power (3ph) ● ●
● ●
Autotransformer winding (Η2) temperature
Autotransformer oil temperature ● ●
EHV POWER
400 KV BUS COUPLER BAY TCC
SUBSTATION PLANT
Current of three phases ● ●

Voltage of three phases (the 3 phase and 3 polar voltages ● ●


are presented)
Frequency at each bus bar ●

Note

(1) Only the three (3) polar


(2) The measurements of 150KV bay to Power Plant, will be designated during the execution of the
Project

- 90 -
TABLE 4.3
EHV POWER
150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY TCC DCC
SUBSTATION PLANT
Current of three phases ● ●
Voltage of three phases (the 3 phase and 3 polar voltages
● ● (1)
are presented)
Active power (3ph) ● ●
Reactive power (3ph) ● ●
EHV POWER
150 KV OVERHEAD T.L. BAY FOR POWER PLANT SUBSTATION
TCC DCC
PLANT
Current of three phases ● ● (2)
Voltage of three phases (the 3 phase and 3 polar voltages
● ● (1)
are presented) (2)
Active power (3ph) ● ● (2)
Reactive power (3ph) ● ● (2)
Active energy (3ph) ● (2)
Reactive energy (3ph) ● (2)
EHV POWER
150 KV TRANSFORMER BAY TCC DCC
SUBSTATION PLANT

Current of three phases ● ● ●


Voltage of three phases (the 3 phase and 3 polar voltages
● ● (1) ● (1)
are presented)
Active power (3ph) ● ● ●

Reactive power (3ph) ● ● ●

Active energy (3ph) ● ●

Reactive energy (3ph) ● ●


EHV POWER
150 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TCC DCC
SUBSTATION PLANT

Current of three phases ● ●


Voltage of three phases (the 3 phase and 3 polar voltages
● ● (1)
are presented)

Active power (3ph) ● ●

Reactive power (3ph) ● ●

Autotransformer winding (Y2) temperature ● ●


EHV POWER
150 KV BUS COUPLER BAY TCC DCC
SUBSTATION PLANT

Current of three phases ● ●


Voltage of three phases (the 3 phase and 3 polar voltages
● ● (1)
are presented)

Frequency at each bus bar ●

Note
(1) Only the three (3) polar
(2) The measurements of 400KV bay to Power Plant, will be designated during the execution of the
Project

- 91 -
TABLE 4.4
EHV
30 KV AUTOTRANSFORMER BAY TCC DCC
SUBSTATION

Current of three phases ● ●


Voltage of three phases (the 3 phase and 3 polar voltages are
● ● (1)
presented)

Reactive power (3ph) ● ●

Autotransformer winding (Χ2) temperature ● ●

Note
(1) Only the three (3) polar voltages

TABLE 4.5

20 KV TRANSFORMER INCOMING BAY (TM panel) PANEL TCC HMI / DCC

Current of three phases ● ●


Voltage of three phases (the 3 phase and 3 polar voltages are
● ●
presented)

Frequency ● ●

Active power (3ph) (per transformer and collectively for all ● ●


transformers in operation)
Reactive power (3ph) (per transformer and collectively for all ● ●
transformers in operation)

Transformer maximum active and reactive power ● ●

Voltages of three phases of the voltage transformer of the 20KV ●


transformer bay.

20 KV OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND FEEDER BAY (OLM


PANEL TCC HMI / DCC
or ULM panel)

Current of phase B ● ●

Maximum current ● ●

20 KV BUS COUPLER BAY (BSM panel) PANEL TCC HMI / DCC

Current of phase B ● ●

- 92 -
TCC
20 KV CAPACITORS BANKS BAY (CM panel) PANEL HMI / DCC
(* )

Current of three phases ● (●) ●

Maximum currents ● (●) ●

Reactive power ● (●) ●

TCC
20 KV FEEDER BAY FOR INDEPENDENT PRODUCER (IPPM) PANEL HMI / DCC
(* )

Current of phase B ● (●) ●

Maximum current ● (●) ●

Active power ● (●) ●

Reactive power ● (●) ●

(*) & (●) Will be designated during the implementation of the contract

- 93 -
PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DEPARTMENT MARCH 2009
PROTECTION SECTION

Technical Description 31/B

Technical description for digital phase overcurrent relays for 400 KV, 150KV,
30 KV sides of ATR and reactors

1. Introductory remarks – range of application.

2. References and standards.

3. Operating environment.

4. Protection basic performance and functions.

5. Additional functions.

6. Design and construction.

7. Communication and interfaces.

8. Software.

9. Tests.

10.Additional requirements.

1
1. Introductory remarks – range of application.

This technical description concerns digital overcurrent relays to be installed in PPC


power transmission system. It establishes requirements for the performance, design,
testing and operation of the relevant equipment and related software. The relays are
primarily intended to provide fast, selective and reliable clearance of faults in
transmission network and especially in 400, 150, 30 KV sides of ATR and reactors.
2. References and standards.

The items to be offered (hardware/software) will conform to the international


standards and codes of practice, mainly:
- Currently valid IEC-61850, 60255-3, 60255-5 60255-22 and 60255-21 standards
applicable for such devices covering performance, insulation and disturbance
requirements, indicately :
 Dielectric withstand : IEC 255-2,5
 Vibration and shock during operation : IEC 255-21 class II
 Disturbance tests :
IEC 255-22-1 class III,
IEC 255-22-4 class III or IV,
IEC 801-4 level 4,
IEC 255-22-2 class III
IEC 801-2 class III (type approval)
In case of lack of international regulations, conformity to the national standards (i.e.
the manufacturer’s country standards) applicable for such devices could be
considered, subject to purchaser’s approval (ANSI, IEEE, VDE, …). In that case the
corresponding IEC standard will be mentioned.
Finally, conformity statement of the manufacturer according to the provision of EU
directive 73/23/ΕΕC and 89/336/EEC will be required.

3. Operating environment.

• Network data
The relays will be installed in transmission network of PPC.
Rated voltage : 400, 150, 30 KV
System neutral : earthed
Nominal frequency : 50 Ηz (in emergency conditions frequency could be between
47.5 Hz και 51 Hz)
The secondary nominal current of CTs is 1A or 5A.

• Power supply
In PPC substation for the supply of the control equipment is available a battery
system providing DC voltage of a level 220V DC / 110V DC.

2
• Ambient conditions
The relays will be designed for indoor operation over a temperature range from
-5° to +55ºC and a humidity range from 10% to 90%.

4. Protection basic performance and functions.

• Required protection functions of the relay


a. Definite time phase, earth and negative sequence overcurrent protection with
two (2) stages for phase, earth and negative sequence: (Ι>, Ι>>), (ΙΕ>, ΙΕ >>)
and (Ι2>, Ι2 >>). In total six (6) stages.
b. Inverse time phase, earth and negative sequence overcurrent protection with
characteristic curves as per IEC 60255-3, which are inverse time, very inverse
time, extremely inverse time and long inverse time with one overcurrent stage
for phase Ιp and one for earth ΙpΕ, respectively. Two, in total.

• Required setting ranges of the relays


a. Definite time overcurrent protection
1. phase (Ι>): ( 0,1 to 4) x IN in steps of 0,1A
2. earth (ΙΕ>): ( 0,05 to 1) x IN in steps of 0,1A
3. phase (Ι>>): ( 0,1 to 20) x IN in steps of 0,1A
4. earth (ΙΕ>>): ( 0,05 to 1) x IN in steps of 0,1A
5. time delay : 0 - 150 sec in steps of 0,1sec

b. Inverse time overcurrent protection


1. phase (Ιp): ( 0,1 to 3,2) x IN in steps of 0,1A
2. earth (ΙpΕ): ( 0,1 to 1,0) x IN in steps of 0,1A
3. Time multiplier: 0,05 – 1,5 sec (IEC) or 0,5-15 sec (ANSI)

5. Additional functions.

Except of the basic overcurrent protection as described above the following


additional functions are required:
 Hardware options
- A number of LEDs on the relay front panel or on the display for indications of
the fault type and health of the relay and dc supply.
It is desirable of LEDs to be programmable by the user. In the offer the number
of LEDs on the relay front panel must be mentioned.
- Optoisolator digital inputs for remote control of various functions three (3) at
least.
- Digital outputs (preferably programmable by the operator) two (2) for operation
(heavy duty) and three (3) for indication. Five (5) in total.
Minimum requirements:
♦ Trip command
♦ Contacts for indication of the type of fault and operation mode
♦ Self – check (watchdog)
♦ Operation of relay
3
 Software options.
- The relay settings can be changed remotely by the serial interface or locally by
the relay front panel interface.
- Event reporting (minimum requirements) :
♦ Indication of the last 4 events.
♦ Information provided : Date/time of the event, type of fault, values of trip
currents.

6. Design and construction.

All functions will be included in a housing providing degree of protection IP50


according to IEC.
The construction preferably will be of modular design with plug-in unit facilitating
repairs.
The installation will be flush mounting.
All the appropriate accessories (special cables/ plugs interfaces, adaptors etc.) for
communication and testing have to be included in the price.
In the case of draw-out input unit, automatic short-circuit of current contacts have to
be foreseen.
The dc/dc converter accommodated in the relay housing will provide operation
having an input voltage 220 VDC.
The trip and ON output contacts will be of heavy duty with the following ratings:
 Output contacts
- Continuous current carrying capacity : 5 Α
- Making capacity : 30 Α
- Breaking capacity : 0.5 Α στα 220V DC

 Signaling contacts
- Continuous current carrying capacity : 5 Α
- Making capacity : 10 Α
- Breaking capacity : 0.1 Α στα 220V DC

7. Communication and interfaces.

The relay must be equipped with the following ports and interfaces:
- User interface (keyboard & displays) on the front plate of the relay ensuring dialog
with the relay permitting setting, operation, metering and fault reporting.
- The relay shall be capable for communicating via an Ethernet port via IEC-61850
protocol.
- Serial interface (standard type serial port) RS232 for connection of a personal
computer and for data transfer to the control centre via modem.
The communication protocols will be compatible with the standard public
communication networks according to the recommendation of the international
regulations.
Together with the relay, the supplier must provide twenty (20) cables at least for the
communication of the relay with PC.
4
8. Software.

Software for the operation of the offered devices will be provided on the basis of a
royalty free, non-exclusive, with irrevocable license to use for the operation of the
relays. This term is applicable for the software covering all issues: Settings, setting
transmission, fault reporting, communication relay-PC and communication relay –
remote station.
The software shall be menu-driven, friendly to the user and easy to be followed even
by an inexperienced operator (three (3) copies at least).

9. Tests.

The package to be offered will be in compliance with the standards mentioned in §2


above.
The offered devices shall be certified by conformance test performed in accordance
with IEC-61850-10. The certificate must be of level A (level A means independent
Lab, e.g. KEMA).
The certificate can be of level B (manufacturer’s Lab) if the manufacturer’s Lab has
been qualified by the UCA International Users Group.
In the first case the certificate (level A) must be submitted along with technical
offer. In the second case the certificate (level B), along with the UCA International
Users Group certification to the manufacturer must be submitted in the technical
offer.
Existing certificates and tests reports will be accepted provided that they will be
found satisfactory by the purchaser. Conformity to the relevant EU directives and
guidelines is also required.

10. Additional requirements.

Bidders have to provide full documentation concerning the installation,


commissioning, operation, testing, troubleshooting of the equipment. Furthermore
complete instructions will be delivered for the operation of the related software.
Also references and documentation will be provided which demonstrate that the
offered hardware/software packages have been used in commercial scale and that
the offered material is part of the manufacturer’s standard production.
Guarantee of good operation for a period of at least five (5) years.

5
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 31/B

ATTACHMENT “A”

1. Type of the offered relay : …………………………………..


2. Does the offered relays conform
to the international standards
and codes stated in §2 ? : …………………………………..

3. Temperature and humidity


conditions for which the relay is
designed to operate : …………………………………..

4. Has the relay two (2) stages of


negative sequence (I2>, I2>>) : …………………………………..

5. Required setting ranges of the relay


a. Definite time overcurrent protection
1. phase (I>) :(………to…….)× IN, in steps of …..A
2. earth (IE>) :(………to…….)× IN, in steps of …..A
3. phase (I>>) :(………to…….)× IN, in steps of …..A
4. earth (IE>>) :(………to…….)× IN, in steps of …..A
Time delay :(………to…….) sec, in steps of …..sec

b. Inverse time overcurrent protection

1. phase (Ιp) : (….. to…..) x IN, in steps of ………A


2. earth (ΙpΕ) : ( …..to.….) x IN, in steps of ………A
Time multiplier : ………..to…………

6. Are there LEDs for indications,


on the relay front panel? : …………………………………..
- Are the LEDs programmable? : …………………………………..

7. Number of digital inputs : …………………………………..

8. Number of digital outputs : …………………………………..


- Are they programmable? : …………………………………..

9. Can the relay settings be


changed remotely or locally
by front panel interface? : …………………………………..

10. How many indications and of


which information, can be recorded? : …………………………………..

11. Degree of protection for relays housing : …………………………………..

12. Is the construction modular with


plug-in units? : …………………………………..
6
13. Are accessories such as, cables,
plugs, adaptors etc, included
in the offer? : …………………………………..

14. Is the input unit of draw out type? : …………………………………..

-Is automatic short-circuit of


the current contacts, foreseen? : …………………………………..

15. Output contacts


- Continuous current carrying capacity : ………………………….…….…..
- Making capacity : ……………………………..……..
- Breaking capacity : ……………………………..……..

16. Is the relay equipped with keyboard


and display, for user interfacing? : ….……………………………..……..

17. Is the relay capable of communicating


via Ethernet port via IEC-61850 protocol? : …...……………………..…………..
-Are certificates according to
IEC-61850-10, provided? : ……….…………………..………..

18. Is the relay equipped with serial


port for connection with PC? : ……………………………..……..

19. Can the relay be configured by an integrated


keyboard-display and also by PC? : ……………………………..……..

20. Are the necessary cables for communication


of the relay with PC, provided? : ………………………….…………..

21. Is the software provided royalty


free and user friendly? : …………………………….………..

22. Is the software covering issues of


settings, setting transmission, fault
reporting, communication with PC
and remote center? : …………………………………..

23. Is the offered hardware/software used


in commercial scale and part of the
manufacturer’s standard production? : …………………………………..

24. Is guarantee of good operation for a


period of at least five (5) years provided? : …………………………………..

25. Power consumption of the relay : …………………………………..

26. Dimensions of the relay : …………………………………..

7
PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION S.A.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION TD-16/3

DIGITAL DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS


FOR TRANSMISSION 150KV NETWORKS

DECEMBER 2008

ATHENS

1
1. Introductory remarks - range of application.

This technical description concerns digital distance protection relays to be installed in PPC
transmission power system of a nominal vo1tage of 150 KV. It establishes requirements for
the performance, design, testing and operation οf the relevant equipment and related
software. The relays are primarily intended to provide fast, selective and reliable clearance of
faults in high voltage network.
Ιn addition to the fundamental distance protection function supplementary οr optional
functions are required covering the needs for operation in a modem working environment.

2. References and standards.

The items to be offered (hardware/software) will conform to the international standards and
codes of practice, mainly:
- Currently valid IEC standards applicable for such devices covering performance, insulation
and disturbance requirements, indicately :
 Withstand voltage : (IEC 255-5)

- Industrial frequency : 2KV, 50 Ηz, 1min


- Impulse test 1,2/50 µς, 5KV
 Disturbance tests (IEC 255-22/1,2,3,4)

- High frequency 1ΜΗz/2,5/1,0 KV (common/differential mode)


 Vibration/shock requirements (IEC 255-21-1) : class ΙΙ

(IEC 255-21-3) : class ΙΙ


 CCITT recommendation, the application of which will ensure unobstacle

communication with the relays through the existing communication network.


Ιn case of lack of international regulations, conformity to the national standards (i.e. the
manufacturer's country standards) applicable for such devices could be considered, subject to
purchaser's approval (ANSI, VDE etc.).
Finally, conformity statement of the manufacturer according to the provision of ΕU directive
73/23/EEC and 89/336/EEC will be required.

3. Operating environment.

• Network data
The relays will be installed in the 150KV transmission network of PPC.
The main data of this network are shown below.
Rated voltage : 150KV rms
System neutral :solidly earthed
Nominal frequency : 50 Ηz (in emergency conditions frequency could be
between 47.5 Ηz to 51 Ηz)
Short-circuit level : 6500 MVΑ (nominal)

2
• VT, CT characteristics
The secondary nominal voltage of the inductive or capacitive potential transformers is
typically 120 / 3 or 100 / 3 and their class 3P/0.5.
Nominal secondary current of the CTs is 1A and their class 5P20 and burden 60VA.

• Power supply
In 150KV PPC substation for the supply of the control/recording equipment is available a
battery system providing DC voltage of a level of 110V or 220V (+10%, -10%).

• Electromagnetic interference
The relays will be installed in high voltage installation and it is the manufacturer’s
responsibility to provide all necessary measures (grounding, shielding) to assure reliable
operation.

• Ambient conditions
The relays will be designed for indoor operation over a temperature range from –5 oC to 55oC
and humidity range from 5% to 90%.

4. Protection basic performance and functions.

Distance relay will be numerical type and will ensure clearance of all types of phase or
ground faults in the protected zone and direction providing selective three phase tripping.
Fault detection will include impedance excitation and eventually underimpedance, earth -
fault and overcurrent excitation.
The impedance characteristics of the relay will be quadrilateral (or mho only for faults
between phases) ensuring enhanced stability in case of load encroachment.
At least 3-distrance zones will be provided (two zones forward and one zone reverse)

The reach of the distance zones can be selectable within the range 80 Ohm secondary in X-
axis and 30 Ohm secondary in R-axis.
The relay will be fast with a maximum permissible operating time 30 msec for all types of
faults.
At least four groups of settings have to be stored in the relay which must be selectable by the
user during operation either locally by on-the-relay interface or remotely via external signal.
Marshalling of binary inputs, binary output indicators on the relay front panel must be
possible by means of the interface on the front or remotely.
The assignments of inputs, outputs can be easily restructured for adaptation to the on site
conditions.
The contacts assignment can be performed by selection from an existing library in the
memory of the relay and/or by establishment of equations based on the Boolean logic.

3
In addition to the basic distance protection function, a package of extra functions is requested
to meet the needs for the efficient operation of the network. Analytically :
- Switch-on-to fault feature (SOTF) : by monitoring the manual close command
over a defined period, SOTF will ensure instantaneous tripping without
autoreclosing when the circuit breaker is closed onto a fault.
- Back-up overcurrent - time protection function : it will be activated in case of
failure of voltage measurement circuit.
- Teleprotection: typically the permissive underreach scheme is used.
Optionally other schemes will be provided (direct transfer zone extension,
overreach or blocking scheme)
- Autoreclosing: fast three pole autoreclose.
- Synchrocheck: feature related to the autoreclosure function (for remote
control). It ensures circuit breaker closure only in synchronize conditions
(selectable by the user).
- Fault locator.
- Fault recording : in the event of a fault and/or excitation the fault data will be
stored in the relay for analysis. The fault data can be read remotely via
modem. Ιn the offer it must be clearly stated the memory capacity and the
number/time length of the faults which can be stored. The capacity of the
memory will permit the storage of at least four faults. It must be underlined
that the fault report will include digital events and analog waveforms.
- Metering: it enables real time measurements of all analog quantities (U,I,P,Q)
either locally or remotely via modem.
- Directional earth fault (DEF) function it is used for achievement of
discriminative clearance of high resistance earth fault.
- Self-monitoring: During operation self-monitoring tests will be performed and
in case of an internal fault or loss of dc supply a signal is issued for protection
blocking and/or warning.
- Circuit Breaker Failure Protection : by monitoring the circuit breaker status
after an issue of a trip command over a time period while the relay excitation
is yet active a circuit breaker failure is issued.

5. Design and construction.

Αll functions will be included in a housing providing degree of protection ΙΡ51 according to
IEC.
The construction preferably will be of modular design with plug-in units facilitating repairs
and providing self-diagnostic (fault tracing) for each module.
The installation will be flush mounting.
Αll the appropriate specia1 accessories (special cables/ plugs interfaces, adaptors etc.) for
communication and testing have to be included in the offer.

4
Automatic short-circuit of current contacts must to be foreseen, in the case where the current
input unit is of draw out type.
The dc/dc converter accommodated in the relay housing will provide uninterrupted operation
and it must have an input voltage of 110 V DC or 220 V DC.

The analog to digital converter will digitize the input signal with a resolution of 12 bits (min
requirements) for reliable wareform operation. .
The heavy duty trip output contacts will be of heavy duty with the following ratings
(minimum requirements) : .
a. Current carrying capacity :5Α
b. Making capacity (L/R=40ms) : 1000W/VA
c. Breaking capacity : 30W/VA
d. Number of contacts :6

Signalling (indication) configurable output contacts


a. Rated voltage : 220 or 110 V DC
b. Continuous Current : 1A
c. Switching making capability : 0.10A at 250 V DC
d. Switching breaking capability
(for DC with L/R <40 msec) : 0.10A at 250V DC
e. Number of contacts : 10

Binary (Digital) Inputs


a. Rated Voltage : 220 or 110 V DC
b. Rated Voltage tolerance : +10%, -15%
c. Number of digital inputs : 12

The switching/breaking capacity of the contacts must be mentioned in the offer. The function
of the alarm contacts will be assignable and their configuration can be done easily by the
software locally or remotely. Signal contacts will provide information for the status of the
relay in case of maloperation.
Twelve (12) digital inputs and sixteen (16) digital outputs at least are required.

6. Communication and interfaces.

The relay shall be fitted with two (2) serial ports for reasons of interfacing and specifically
with:

1. One serial port suitable for connection to a PC.


An operator program shall be available to enable user - friendly parameter setting,
analysis of fault data and records and commissioning either locally or remotely via
modem.

5
2. One serial port suitable for system interface (fiber optic) shall be available for
connection to a digital computerized substation control system. The communication
protocol shall be as per IEC 61850.

3. Besides an internal synchronization clock, the relay must be capable of being


synchronized via the substation automation control system's master clock which has
the capability of G.P.S. synchronization besides that of its own.

4. A number of 20 cables for the communication of the relay with PC must be included
in the offer.

5. The relay must be equipped with an integral keyboard and display for parameter
setting

7. Software.

Software for the operation (3 copies at least, included in the price of the offered devices) will
be provided on the basis of a royalty free, non-exclusive, with irrevocable license to use for
the operation of the relays. This term is applicable for the software covering all issues:
Setting transmission, calibration, fault analysis, communication relay-PC and communication
relay -remote station.
The software will be menu-driven, friendly to the user and easy to be followed even by an
inexperienced operator. The fault analysis software will be capable of displaying on a VGA
all analog waveforms and binary signals.

8. Tests

The package to be offered will be in compliance with the standards mentioned in §2 above.
Tests certificates, issued by official laboratories, will be provided covering type and routine
tests.
Existing certificates and test reports will be accepted providing that they will be found
satisfactory by the purchaser. Conformity to the relevant EU directives and guidelines is also
required.

9. Additional requirements

Bidders have to provide full documentation concerning the installation, commissioning,


operation, maintenance, trouble-shooting of the equipment.
Furthermore complete instructions will be delivered for the operation of the related software
in Greek or English language.

6
Also references and documentation will be provided which demonstrate that the offered
hardware/software packages have been used in commercial scale and that the offered material
is part of the manufacturer’s standard production.
In the references a list of users of the offered products, in the area of the power transmission
networks, will be provided. The purchaser can request certifications of users concerning the
good performance of the products.

After the assignment of the contract the contractor has to provide full technical
documentation in Greek or English language covering all relevant issues on
the/operation/testing/troubleshooting ensuring an unobstacle operation by the PPC personnel
without any intervention of the manufacturer/contractor.

Guarantee of good operation for a period of at least five (5) years.

The contractor will undertake the cost of training in the premises of the supplier of three
engineers covering the cost of transportation and accommodation.

All hardware/software features will be according to this specification. Any deviation has to
be clearly described and identified in the offer.

10. Certification

The offered devices shall be certified by conformance test performed in accordance with IEC
61850-10. The certificate must be of level A (level A means independent Lab, e.g. KEMA).
The certificate can be of level B (manufacturer’s Lab) if the manufacturer’s Lab has been
qualified by the UCA International Users Group.
In the first case the certificate (level A) must be submitted along with technical offer. In the
second case the certificate (level B), along with the UCA International Users Group
certification to the manufacturer must be submitted in the technical offer.

7
A
ATTTTA
ACCH
HMMEEN
NTT ““A
A””

1. Type of the offered relay :……………………………………………

2. Do the offered items conform to the


international standards and codes of
practice mentioned in paragraph 2? :……………………………………………

3. Analog Inputs of the relay:


a. Rated current : ……………………………………………
bb.. Rated voltage : ……………………………………………

4. Auxiliary supply voltage : ……………………………………………

5. Auxiliary supply voltage tolerance : ……………………………………………

6. Are the relays protected by


electromagnetic interference? : ……………………………………………

7. Temperature tolerance range :. .……………………………………………

8. Do the relays ensure clearance of all types


of phase or ground faults in the protected
zone and direction by providing selective
three phase tripping ? : .……………………………………………

9. Criteria used for fault detection : ……………………………………………


..……………………………………………

10. Type of measurement characteristic (§ 4) : ……………………………………………

11. Are the zones selectable? : ……………………………………………

12. Number and description of the zones : ……………………………………………


Reach of the zones? : ……………………………………………

13. Operating (response) time of the relay : ……………………………………………

14. How many groups of settings can be


stored in the relay ? : ……………………………………………
Are they selectable ? : ……………………………………………

15. Is the Switch-on-to fault (SOTF)


function available ? : ……………………………………………

8
16. Are the relays equipped with back-up
overcurrent - time protection function ? : ……………………………………………

17. For the teleportaction function, indicate


modes of operation : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………
…………………………………………….
…………………………………………….

18. Are the offered relays equipped with


autoreclosure feature : ……………………………………………

19. Is the offered relay equipped with


synchrocheck? : ……………………………………………

20. Is the offered relay equipped with


fault locator? : ……………………………………………

21. - Is the offered relay equipped with


disturbance recording? : ……………………………………………
- Can the fault data be read remotely via
modem? : ……………………………………………

22. Haw many faults can be stored in the


memory of the disturbance recorder and
what is the time length of fault? : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………

23. Is the offered relay equipped with real-time


measurement feature (V, I, P, Q) ? : ……………………………………………

24. Is the offered relay equipped with directional


earth fault protection function (DEF) ? : ……………………………………………

25. Is the offered relay equipped with


self monitoring (checking) feature? : ……………………………………………

26. Describe how the breaker failure protection


feature operates : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………
..……………………………………………
...……………………………………………

27. Degree of protection of the relay case : ……………………………………………

9
28. Is the offered relay of the modular design
type? : ……………………………………………

29. Is the offered relay suitable for panel flush


mounting? : ……………………………………………

30. Is the relay equipped with screw type


terminals suitable for 2.5mm2 conductors : ……………………………………………

31. Is automatic short-circuiting of the current


contacts available in the case where the
current input unit is of the draw out type? : ……………………………………………

32. Heavy duty Output Contacts


a. Number of heavy duty contacts : ……………………………………………
b. Continuous current : ……………………………………………
c. Short-time current (0.5 sec) : ……………………………………………
d. Switching making capability : ……………………………………………
e. Switching breaking capability : ……………………………………………

33. Signaling contacts


a. Are they configurable? : ……………………………………………
b. Number of signaling contacts : ……………………………………………
c. Rated voltage : ……………………………………………
d. Continuous current : ……………………………………………
e. Switching making capability : ……………………………………………
f. Switching breaking capability (L/R<40ms): …………………………………………

34. Digital Inputs:


a. Rated voltage : ……………………………………………
b. Number of inputs : ……………………………………………

35. Is the offered relay equipped with two (2)


serial ports? One for connection to a PC, the
other for connection to a digital
computerized substation control system? : ……………………………………………

36. Can the relay be set by PC? : ……………………………………………

37. Can the software be used for parameter


settings, analysis of fault data and record
and commissioning? : ……………………………………………

38. What is the communication protocol used


for the connection of the relay to the digital
computerized substation control system? : ……………………………………………

10
39. Is the offered relay equipped with internal
synchronization clock? : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………

40. Can the offered relay be synchronized via


a master clock belonging to a substation
automation control system? : ……………………………………………

41. Is the required number of cables


for the communication of the relay
with PC provided? : ……………………………………………

42. Is the relay equipped with an integral


keyboard and display for parameter setting?: ……………………………………………

43. Is software provided according to the


requirements of paragraph 7? : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………

44. Type of the software? : ……………………………………………

45. Is guarantee of good operation for a period


of at least five (5) years provided ? : ……………………………………………

46. Have the additional requirements of paragraph 9


taken under consideration at the offer ? : ……………………………………………

47. -Have the offered devices been certified


by conformance test performed in
accordance with IEC 61850-10? : ……………………………………………
-Are certificates provided? : ……………………………………………

11
PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION S.A.
T/NPRD/SUBSTATION AND EHV SUBSTATION SPECIFICATIONS AND
EQUIPMENT SECTION

January 2006

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION TD-37/5

NUMERICAL OVERCURRENT AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION RELAYS


TO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH 155 KV SHUNT CAPACITOR BANKS

I. SCOPE
This hereby technical description covers PPC’s requirements regarding
functional features, technical characteristics and testing of numerical
overcurrent and overload protection relays.

II. KEYWORDS
Numerical overcurrent and overload relays, overcurrent protection relays.

III. STANDARDS
The relays shall conform to IEC standards. Relays as per ANSI/IEEE standard
can be offered, subject, however to PPC approval.

IV. USE
The relay with separate overload (overcurrent) and short-circuit protection
(overcurrent) will be used to protect 155 KV, 26.7 MVAR shunt capacitor
banks against overloading and all types of short circuits. (3-phase and phase-
to-ground faults)

V. OPERATING CONDITIONS
1. Installation : Indoors, inside a relay kiosk.

2. Limits of ambient temperature


during operation. : - 10°C to +45°C

3. Altitude : Up to 1000 m above sea level

1
VI. PPC’s 150 KV ELECTRIC SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS

1. Nominal Voltage (phase to phase) : 150 KV

2. Maximum Operating Voltage


(phase to phase) : 170 KV

3. Number of phases : 3

4. Nominal Frequency : 50 Hz

5. Short Circuit level : 30 KA

6. Basic Insulation level : 750 KV

7. The 150 KV system is solidly grounded :

8. Available auxiliary D.C. supply voltage : 110 V DC

VII. REQUIRED PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF THE RELAY

1. Inverse time overcurrent protection for all phase and ground faults.
The short-circuit protection shall be set above 3×IN, where IN≈100 A
IN = Shunt Capacitor bank current.
The time relay shall be set at 5 to 7 cycles. Given the fact that the capacitors shall
be switched via control switching relays, the expected inrush current shall be of
the order of (35-45)×IN where IN≈100 A.

2. Overload protection (overcurrent) of definite time.


The overload protection shall be set in the range of 1.3 to 1.4 times the rated
current of the capacitor bank (IN≈100 A). The time delay shall be set long enough
in order to avoid false tripping during switching (at about 5-7 cycles, that is from
100 ms to 140 ms).

3. The characteristic curves of the inverse time for overcurrent and overload
protection shall be in accordance with IEC 60255-3, which are inverse time, very
inverse time, extremely inverse time and long inverse time.

VIII. PROTECTIVE ARRANGEMENT

Since the capacitor bank is solidly grounded, the total current (phases and ground)
will be derived from the phase currents by means of the Holmgreen circuit indicated
below in Fig. No 1.

2
BR

Fig. No 1

IX. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAY

1. Rated input current (In) (from the CTs) : 5A

2. Rated frequency : 50 Hz

3. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : 110 V DC

4. Setting ranges

a. Definite time overload protection (phase and earth, I> and IE>)
Overcurrent element range (I)
(for phase and earth) : (0.5 to 4)×In in steps
of 0.1A
Delay time (for phase and earth) : 0.01 to 20 seconds in steps
of 0.1 sec.

b. Inverse time overcurrent protection (phase and earth, I>> and IE>>)
1. Phases setting range : (0.5 to 4)×In in steps of 0.1A
2. Earth setting range : (0.5 to 4)×In in steps of 0.1A
3. Time multiplier : 0.05 – 1 sec
4. Reset ratio : >95%.

5. Thermal current withstand:


a. 3×In continuous
b. 100×In for one (1) second

X. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED FEATURES OF THE RELAY

1. Type of relay: Numerical of definite and inverse time with four (4) overcurrent
stages (Two for overcurrent (I>> and IE>>) and two for overload (I> and IE>)).

2. The relay terminals shall be of the screw type and they must be suitable to be wired
with 2.5 mm2 size conductors.

3. Setting of parameters shall be accomplished via keypad and display.

3
4. The relay shall be equipped with event and fault recording capability.

5. The relay shall be equipped with a port RS232 for PC connection.

6. The relay will be equipped with a port RS485 for system interfacing via
IEC 61850 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 or Profibus-fms or Modbus/Rtu or
DNP3.0

7. Binary Outputs
The relay shall be equipped with the following programmable outputs:

a. Number of trip relays : at least 2

b. Number of contacts per trip relay : 1, NO

c. Continuous current rating of the contacts


of the trip relay : 5A

d. Current rating of the contacts of the trip relay


for 0.5 sec : 30 A

e. Switching making capacity of the


trip relay contacts : 5 A at 110 V DC

f. Number of alarm relays : 4

g. Number of contacts per alarm relay : at least 1 NO/NC

h. Continuous current rating of the contacts


of the alarm relay : 1A

XI. TESTS

A. Routine Tests

1. Power frequency voltage withstand test :


2 KV rms, 50 Hz, 1 minute as per IEC 60255-5.

B. Type Tests

1. Impulse voltage withstand test :


5KV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at internals
of 5 sec as per IEC 60255-5.

2. High Frequency test :


2.5 KV peak, 1 MHz, τ = 15 ms,
400 pulses /seconds, duration = 2 sec
as per IEC 60255-22-1, class III.

4
3. Fast Transient interference test :
4 KV, 5/50 ns, 5 KHz, burst length = 15 ms,
repetition rate 300 ms : both polarities,
duration = 1 min as per IEC 60255 – 22 – 4
and IEC 61000-4-4, class IV.

XII. DATA TO BE SUBMITTED BY BIDDERS

1. Bidders must provide all information requested in “ATTACHMENT A” of


this hereby technical description.
Failure on the bidder’s part to comply with this request will be taken as
sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

2. Technical pamphlets and brochures which will help the evaluation process.

3. Outline and wiring drawings of the offered relay including mounting


instructions.

4. Any type test certificates for the type tests specified in this hereby technical
description.

XIII. PACKING

The relays shall be packed inside robust paper boxes, proper for this type of
equipment.

5
“ATTACHMENT A”

NUMERICAL OVERCURRENT AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION RELAYS


TO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH 155 KV SHUNT CAPACITOR BANKS

Data which must be provided by all bidders. Failure to comply will result in rejection of the
offer.

1. Type and manufacturer of the relay : ………………………………….

2. Temperature operating limits of the relay : ………………………………….

3. Rated input current : …………………………………..

4. Rated frequency : ………………………………….

5. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : …………………………………..

6. Overload protection of definite time (I> and IE>)


a. Setting range
- Phase : …………………………………
- Earth : …………………………………
b. Delay time (for phase + earth) : …………………….……………

7. Overcurrent protection of inverse time (I>> and IE>>)


1. Setting range
- Phase : …………………………………
- Earth : …………………………………
2. Time multiplier : ………………………………….
3. Reset ratio : ………………………………….

8. Is the relay suitable for surface panel


mounting ? : ………………………………….

9. Are the relay terminals of the screw type


and suitable to be wired with 2.5 mm
size conductors ? : …………………………………

10. How is parameterization accomplished ? : …………………………………

11. Is the relay equipped with event and fault


recording capability ? : …………………………………

12. Is the relay equipped with a port for PC


connection ? : ………………………………...

13. Is the relay equipped with a port for


system interfacing via IEC 61850
protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 or
Profibus-fms or Modbus/Rtu or DNP3.0 ? : ………………………………...

6
14. Binary Outputs

a. Number of trip relays : ………………………………...

b. Number of contacts per trip relay and


type : …………………………………

c. Continuous current rating of the trip


relay contacts : …………………………………

d. Current rating of the trip relay contacts


for 0.5 sec : …………………………………

e. Switching making capacity of the trip


relay contacts at 110 V DC : ………………………………...

f. Number of alarm relays : …………………………………

g. Number of contacts per alarm relay


and type : ………………………………...

h. Continuous current rating of the


contacts of the alarm relay : ………………………………..

i. Are the output contacts programmable? : ………………………………..

15. Power consumption of the relay in VA : ……………………………….

16. Weight of the relay : ………………………………..

17. Are the relay terminals of the screw type? : ………………………………….

18. Thermal current withstand


a. continuous : ………………………………..

b. for one (1) second : ………………………………..

IIa/AG/ia/Technical 2/8.10.2002
ΙΙδ/pm/AG/March 2005
IΙδ/σ.π/Α.G/April 2005
ΙΙδ/Revision No. 5/pm/AG/January2006

7
PPC S.A.
T/NPRD / Substation and ehv substation specifications and equipment Section

January 2006

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION TD-38/4

CURRENT UNBALANCE RELAYS TO BE USED IN


CONJUNCTION WITH 155KV SHUNT CAPACITOR BANKS
Revision No.4

I. SCOPE

This hereby technical description covers PPC’s requirements regarding functional


features, technical characteristics and testing of current unbalance relays.

II. KEY WORDS

Current unbalance relays, overcurrent relays.

III. STANDARDS

The relays shall conform to IEC standards. Relays as per ANSI/IEEE can be offered,
subject, however to PPC approval.

IV. USE

The relay will be used to detect capacitor element failure or failures anywhere in the
two branches of each phase of a 150KV, 26.7MVAR internally fused shunt capacitor
banks and to provide either alarm or tripping depending on the number of failed
elements.

-1-
V. OPERATING CONDITIONS

1. Installation : Indoors, inside a relay kiosk located in the area


of the switching station.

2. Limits of ambient
temperature during service : -10oC to +45oC

3. Altitude : Up to 1000 m above sea level

VI. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PPC’s 150KV SYSTEM

1. Nominal Voltage (phase-to-phase) : 150KV


2. Maximum Operating Voltage (phase to phase) : 170KV
3. Number of phases :3
4. Nominal frequency : 50Hz
5. Short Circuit level : 30kA
6. Basic Insulation level : 750KV
7. Available auxiliary D.C. supply voltage : 110V D.C.
8. The 150KV system is solidly grounded (earthed).

VII. REQUIRED PROTECTION FUNCTION OF THE RELAYS

Unbalance Protection

The relay is going to be used in conjunction with a CT of ratio 1/1A which is connected
midpoint between the two branches of each phase (H-bridge connection) of a 155KV,
26.7MVAR internally fused capacitor banks (16 units of 556.2KVAR at each phase, at
11,186KV).
The relay shall provide an alarm signal after the failure of any two (2) capacitor
elements (about 0,23A) and a trip signal after the failure of four (4) capacitor elements
(about 0,5A)

VIII. REQUIRED FEATURES OF THE RELAYS

1. Type: Numerical, single-phase, overcurrent of definite time with two stages (low and
high)

-2-
2. The relay must be of reduced sensitivity for frequencies other than the fundamental
so as to prevent undesired operations.

3. Both the output trip contacts and the output alarm contacts of the relay must be
programmable so that some can be assigned to the low stage element and some to the
high stage element. (At least one trip and one alarm to the low stage and one trip and
one alarm to the high stage).

4. The relay shall be suitable for surface panel mounting.

5. The relay terminals shall be of the screw type and they must be suitable to be wired
with 2,5mm2 size conductors.

IX. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAYS

1. Rated frequency : 50Hz


2. Setting range for the low stage (IE>) : (0.1-5) × In in steps of 0.1
3. Setting range for the high stage(IE>>) : (0.1-1) × In in steps of 0.1
4. Delay time : 0 to 20sec, both for the low and
high stage
5. Rated input (In) : 1A
6. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : 110V D.C.
7. Number of output contacts for tripping : Two (2) NO
8. Continuous current rating of the output
tripping contacts : 5A
9. Current rating of the output tripping
contacts for 1sec. : 30A
10. Switching making capacity of the output
tripping contacts at 110V D.C. : 550VA
11. Number of output contacts for alarm : 2 NO
12. Continuous current rating of the output
contacts for alarm : 1A
13. Switching making capacity of the output
contacts for alarm at 110V DC : 550VA
14. Thermal current withstand:
a. 2×In continuous
b. 40×In for one (1) second

-3-
X. TESTS

A. Routine Tests

1. Power frequency voltage withstand test: 2KV rms, 50Hz, 1 minute as per IEC 60255-5.

B. Type Tests

1. Impulse voltage withstand test


5KV, 1,2/50µs, 0,5J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals of 5sec as
per IEC 60255-5.
2. High frequency test:
2,5KV peak, 1MHz, τ=15ms, 400 pulses/sec, duration=2sec as per IEC
60255-22-1, Class III.

3. Fast transient interference test:


4KV, 5/50ns, 5kHz, burst length=15ms, repetition rate=300ms, both polarities,
duration=1minute as per IEC-60255-22-4, class IV.

XI. COMMUNICATIONS

1. The relay shall be equipped with RS232 port for PC interfacing.

2. The relay shall be equipped with a port for communicating via IEC 61850 protocol
or IEC 60870-5-103 or Profibus-fms or Modbus/Rtu or DNP3.0

XII. DATA TO BE SUBMITTED BY ALL BIDDERS

1. Bidders must provide all information requested in “ATTACHMENT A” of this


hereby technical description. Failure on the bidder’s part to comply with this request
will be taken as sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

2. Technical pamphlets and brochures that will help the evaluation process.

3. Outline and wiring drawings of the offered relay including mounting instructions.

4. Any type test certificates for the type test specified in this hereby technical
description.

XIII. PACKING

The relays shall be packed inside robust paper boxes proper for this type of equipment.

-4-
“ATTACHMENT A”
CURRENT UNBALANCE RELAYS TO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH 155KV
SHUNT CAPACITOR BANKS

1. Type and manufacturer of the relay : ..................................

2. Temperature operating limits of the relay : ..................................

3. Setting range for the low stage (IE>) : ..................................


a. in steps of : ..................................
b. Delay time : ..................................

4. Setting range for the high stage (IE>>) : ..................................


a. In steps of : ..................................
b. Delay time : ..................................

5. Rated Input : ..................................

6. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : ..................................

7. Number of output contacts for tripping : ..................................

8. Continuous current rating of the output tripping contacts : ..................................

9. Current rating of the output tripping contacts for 1 second : ..................................

10. Switching making capacity of the output tripping contacts at : ..................................


110V D.C.
11. Number of output contacts for alarm : ..................................

12. Continuous current rating of the output contacts for alarm : ..................................

13. Switching making capacity of the output contacts for alarm at


110V D.C. : ..................................
14. Rated frequency : ..................................

15. Power consumption of the relay in VA : ..................................

16. Is the offered relay of reduced sensitivity for frequencies other


than the fundamental so as to prevent undesired operations? : ..................................

17. Is the relay suitable for surface panel mounting? : ..................................

-5-
18. Are the relay terminals of the screw type and suitable to be wired
with 2,5mm2 size conductors? : ...................................
19. Weight of the relay : ..................................

20. Are the trip and alarm output contacts programmable,


so that they can be assigned to both low and high stage elements
of the relay? : ..................................
..................................
..................................
..................................

21. Is the relay equipped with a RS232 port for interfacing with a
PC? : .................................

22. Can the relay communicate via IEC 61850 protocol?


or IEC 60870-5-103 or Profibus-fms or Modbus/Rtu or DNP3.0? : .................................

23. Thermal current withstand


a. continuous : .................................
b. for one (1) second : .................................

Revision No.1 /pm/AG/May 2004


Revision No.2/pm/AG/March 2005
Revision No.3/pm/AG/june 2005
Revision No. 4/pm/AG/January 2006

-6-
PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION S.A.
T/NPRD/SUBSTATION AND EHV SUBSTATION SPECIFICATIONS AND
EQUIPMENT SECTION

January 2006

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION TD-39/3


Revision No.3
VOLTAGE RELAYS TO BE
USED IN CONJUCTION WITH 155 KV SHUNT CAPACITOR BANKS

I. SCOPE

This hereby technical description covers PPC’s requirements regarding


functional features, technical characteristics and testing of voltage relays.

II. KEYWORDS

Overvoltage relay, Voltage relay.

III. STANDARDS

The relays shall conform to IEC standards.

IV. USE

The relay will be used to protect 155 KV, 26.7 MVAR internally fused shunt
capacitor banks against overvoltages.

V. OPERATING CONDITIONS

1. Installation : Indoors, inside a relay kiosk.

2. Limits of ambient temperature


during service : - 10°C to +45°C

3. Altitude : Up to 1000 m above sea level

-1-
VI. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PPC’s 150 KV SYSTEM

1. Nominal Voltage (phase to phase) : 150 KV

2. Maximum Operating Voltage


(phase to phase) : 170 KV

3. Number of phases :3

4. Nominal Frequency : 50 Hz

5. Short Circuit level : 30 KA

6. Basic Insulation level : 750 KV

7. Available auxiliary D.C. supply voltage : 110 V DC

8. The 150 KV system is solidly grounded (earth)

VII. REQUIRED PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF THE RELAY

Overvoltage protection function.


a. Setting range : 80 V to 130 V in
steps of 1 V
b. Delay time : 0 to 40 sec in steps
of 0.1 sec
c. Inherent time delay to operate
(pick up time) : < 40 ms
d. Reset time : < 40 ms
e. Reset ratio : > 0.95

VIII. RELAY SETTINGS

The overvoltage element of the relay shall be set at the value of 1.1xVn, where
Vn=100V, with a time delay of about 30 sec.

IX. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAY

1. Type : Numerical

2. Phases : 3-phase relay

3. Rated frequency : 50 Hz

4. Setting range : 80 to 130 V

5. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : 110 V DC

-2-
6. Inputs : The relay shall be supplied
via three (3) single phase
VT with nominal ratio of
160000/ 3 /100/ 3 V
as shown in Fig. No 1. below.
The secondaries of the three (3)
CTs will be connected in star
(wye)-grounded connection.

7. Outputs contacts : 3 change over or NO

8. Continuous current rating of the output


contacts : 5A

9. Current rating of the output contacts for 0.5s : 30 A

10. Switching making capacity of the output


contacts at 110 V DC : 500 A

L1 L2 L3

VTs
3-phase
voltage
relay

Fig. No 1

X. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED FEATURES OF THE RELAY

1. The relay shall be suitable for surface panel mounting.

2. The relay terminals shall be of the screw type and they must be suitable to be wired
with 2.5 mm size conductors.

3. The relay shall be capable of communicating via IEC-61850 protocol or


IEC 60870-5-103 or profibus-fms or Modbus/RTU or DNP3.0

4. The relay must be equipped with fault disturbance recording capability

5. The relay must be equipped with a RS232 port of PC interfacing.

-3-
XI. TESTS

A. Routine Tests

1. Power frequency voltage withstand test :


2 KV rms, 50 Hz, 1 minute as per IEC 60255-5.

B. Type Tests

1. Impulse voltage withstand test :


5KV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals
of 5 sec as per IEC 60255-5.

2. High Frequency test :


2.5 KV peak, 1 MHz, τ = 15 ms,
400 pulses /seconds, duration = 2 sec
as per IEC 60255-22-1, class III.

3. Fast Transient interference test :


4 KV, 5/50 ns, 5 KHz, burst length = 15 ms,
repetition rate = 300 ms, both polarities,
duration = 1 min as per IEC 60255-22- 4,
class IV.

XII. DATA TO BE SUBMITTED BY BIDDERS

1. Bidders must provide all information required in “ATTACHMENT A” of


this hereby technical description.
Failure on the bidder’s part to comply with this request will be taken as
sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

2. Technical pamphlets and brochures which will help the evaluation process.

3. Outline and wiring drawings of the offered relay including mounting


instructions.

4. Any type test certificates for the type tests specified in this hereby technical
description.

XIII. PACKING

The relays shall be packed inside robust paper boxes proper for this type of
equipment.

-4-
“ATTACHMENT A”

VOLTAGE RELAYS
TO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH 155 KV SHUNT CAPACITORS
BANKS

1. Type and manufacturer of the relay : ………………………………….

2. Temperature operating limits of the relay : ………………………………….

3. Is overvoltage protection function


provided ? : …………………………………..

4. With regard the overvoltage function


a. Setting range : ………………………………….
b. Delay time : ………………………………….
c. Inherent time delay
(or pick up time) : …………………………………..
d. Reset time : …………………………………..
e. Reset ratio : …………………………………..

5. Rated frequency : ………………………………….

6. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : …………………………………..

7. Is the relay suitable to be supplied


via three (3) single-phase VTs
(ratio 160000/V3/100/V3 V)? : …………………………………

8. Number of output contacts : ………………………………….

9. Continuous current rating of the output


contacts. : ………………………………….

10. Current rating of the output contacts


for 1 s. : ………………………………….

11. Switching making capacity of the output


contacts of 110 V DC. : ………………………………….

12. Is the relay suitable for surface panel


mounting ? : ………………………………….

13. Are the relay terminals of the screw type


and suitable to be wired with 2.5 mm
size conductors ? : …………………………………

14. Power consumption of the voltage relay


in VA at 110 V DC. : …………………………………

-5-
15. Is the relay equip with fault
disturbance recording capability? : …………………………………

16. Can the relay communicate via


IEC 61850 protocol?
or IEC 60870-5-103 or Profibus-fms
or Modbus/RTU or DNP3.0? : …………………………………

17. Is the relay equipped with a RS232 port


for PC interfacing? : …………………………………

18. Weight of the relay : …………………………………

Revision/pm/AG/October 2004
Revision No.2/pm/AG/March 2005
Revision No.3/pm/AG/January 2006

-6-
PPC S.A.
T/NPRD / Substation Design and Specifications Section

March 2006

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION TD-40/3

CURRENT UNBALANCE RELAYS TO BE USED IN


CONJUNCTION WITH 20KV SHUNT CAPACITOR BANKS
Revision No.3

I. SCOPE

This hereby technical description covers PPC’s requirements regarding functional


features, technical characteristics and testing of current unbalance relays.

II. KEY WORDS

Current unbalance relays, overcurrent relays.

III. STANDARDS

The relays shall conform to IEC standards. Relays as per ANSI/IEEE can be offered,
subject, however to PPC approval.

IV. USE

The relay will be used to detect capacitor unit failure or failures anywhere in the two
stars (wyes) of 20KV, 4MVAR externally fused shunt capacitor banks and to provide
either alarm or tripping depending on the number of failed units (alarm for one unit
failure, tripping for two unit failures).

-1-
V. OPERATING CONDITIONS

1. Installation : Indoors, inside the control building of the


substation.

2. Limits of ambient
temperature during service : -10oC to +45oC

3. Altitude : Up to 1000 m above sea level

VI. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PPC’s 20KV SYSTEM

1. Nominal Voltage (phase-to-phase) : 20KV


2. Maximum Operating Voltage (phase to phase) : 24KV
3. Number of phases :3
4. Nominal frequency : 50Hz
5. Short Circuit level : 10kA
6. Basic Insulation level : 150KV
7. Available auxiliary D.C. supply voltage : 110V D.C.
8. The 20KV system is grounded (earthed) via a 12Ω resistor.

VII. REQUIRED PROTECTION FUNCTION OF THE RELAYS

Unbalance Protection

The relay is going to be used in conjunction with a CT of ratio 40/5A which is


connected midpoint between the two stars (wyes) of 20KV, 4MVAR externally fused
capacitor banks.
The loss of one capacitor unit causes a current of about 16A(15,75A) to flow between
the neutrals of the two stars (wyes). The loss of two capacitor units causes a current of
about 35A (34,65A) to flow between the neutrals of the two stars (wyes)

VIII. REQUIRED FEATURES OF THE RELAYS

1. Single-phase: overcurrent of definite time

2. The relay must be of reduced sensitivity for frequencies other than the fundamental
so as to prevent undesired operations.

3. The relay shall be equipped with at least two(2) trip output contacts one associated
with the low stage (IE>) and one with the high stage (IE>>) and two output alarm
contacts one for the low stage (IE>) and one associated with the high stage (IE>>)

-2-
4. The relay shall be suitable for flush panel mounting.

5. The relay terminals shall be suitable to be wired with 2,5mm2 size conductors and
preferably be of the screw type.

6. The relay shall be equipped with fault recording capability.

7. The relay shall be capable of communicating via IEC – 60870 – 5 – 103 protocol or
IEC-61850 or Profibus-fms or Modbus/RTU or DNP3.0.

IX. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAYS

1. Required type : overcurrent relay with two stages


(low and high) for detection of
unbalanced currents, single phase,
definite time
2. Rated frequency : 50Hz
3. Setting range for low stage(IE >) : (0,1-3) x In in steps of 0,1
4. Setting range for high stage
(IE>>) : (0,1 – 3) x Ιn in steps of 0,1

5. Delay time : 0 to 20sec for both IE > and IE>>


6. Rated input (In) : 5A
7. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : 110V D.C.
8. Number of output contacts for
tripping : One (1) NO.
9. Continuous current rating of the
output tripping contacts : 5A
10. Current rating of the output
tripping contacts for 1sec. : 30A
11. Switching making capacity of the
output tripping contacts at 110V
D.C. : 550VA
12. Number of output contacts for
alarm : 2 NO, one for the low stage and one
for the high stage.
13. Continuous current rating of the
output contacts for alarm : 1A
14. Switching making capacity of the
output contacts for alarm at 110V
DC : 550VA

-3-
15. Thermal current withstand
a. 2xIn continuous :
b. 40xIn for one (1) second :

X. TESTS

A. Routine Tests

1. Power frequency voltage withstand test: 2KV rms, 50Hz, 1 minute as per IEC
60255-5

B. Type Tests

1. Impulse voltage withstand test


5KV, 1,2/50µs, 0,5J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals of 5sec as
per IEC 60255-5.

2. High frequency test:


2,5KV peak, 1MHz, τ=15ms, 400 pulses/sec, duration=2sec as per IEC 60255-
22-1, Class III.

3. Fast transient interference test:


4KV, 5/50ns, 5kHz, burst length=15ms, repetition rate=300ms, both polarities,
duration=1minute as per IEC-60255-22-4, class IV.

XI. DATA TO BE SUBMITTED BY ALL BIDDERS

1. Bidders must provide all information requested in “ATTACHMENT A” of this


hereby technical description. Failure on the bidder’s part to comply with this request
will be taken as sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

2. Technical pamphlets and brochures that will help the evaluation process.

3. Outline and wiring drawings of the offered relay including mounting instructions.

4. Any type test certificates for the type test specified in this hereby technical
description.

XII. PACKING
The relays shall be packed inside robust paper boxes proper for this type of equipment.
One relay per box.

-4-
“ATTACHMENT A”
CURRENT UNBALANCE RELAYS TO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH 20KV
SHUNT CAPACITOR BANKS

1. Type and manufacturer of the relay : ..................................


…………………….

2. Is the relay single phase and of definite time? : ..................................

3. Temperature operating limits of the relay : ..................................

4. Setting range for the low stage (IE >) : ..................................

a. In steps of : ..................................

b. Delay time : ..................................

5. Setting range for the high stage (IE>>) : ..................................

a. In steps of : ..................................

b. Delay time : ..................................

6. Rated Input (In) : ..................................

7. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : ..................................

8. Number of output contacts for tripping : ..................................

9. Continuous current rating of the output tripping contacts : ..................................

10. Current rating of the output tripping contacts for 1 second : ..................................

11. Switching making capacity of the output tripping contacts at


110V D.C. : ..................................

12. Number of output contacts for alarm : ..................................

13. Continuous current rating of the output contacts for alarm : ..................................

-5-
14. Switching making capacity of the output contacts for alarm at
110V D.C. : ..................................

15. Rated frequency : ..................................

16. Power consumption of the relay in VA : ..................................

17. Is the offered relay of reduced sensitivity for frequencies other


than the fundamental so as to prevent undesired operations? : ..................................

18. Is the relay suitable for flush panel mounting? : ..................................

19. Are the relay terminals of the screw type and suitable to be wired
with 2,5mm2 size conductors? : ..................................

20. Are the relay terminals of the screw type? : ..................................

21. Is the relay equipped with fault recording capability? : ……………………..

22. Is the relay capable of communicating via IEC- 60870-5-103


protocol? : ……………………..

23. Weight of the relay : ..................................

24. Does one output trip contact and one output alarm contact
correspond to the low stage of the relay; : ..................................

25. Does one output trip contact and one output alarm contact
correspond to the high stage of the relay; : ..................................
26. Thermal current withstand capability
a. continuous : ..................................
b. For one (1) second : ..................................

Mt/AG/October 2002
Revision No.1/pm/AG/May 2004
ΙΙδ/pm/AG/June 2005
ΙΙδ/pm/AG/August 2005
ΙΙδ/pm/AG/March 2006

-6-
PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION S.A.
T/NPRD/SUBSTATION DESIGN AND SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION

March 2006

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION TD-41/4

NUMERICAL OVERCURRENT AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION RELAYS


TO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH 20 KV SHUNT CAPACITOR BANKS

I. SCOPE

This hereby technical description covers PPC’s requirements regarding


functional features, technical characteristics and testing of numerical overcurrent
and overload protection relays.

II. KEYWORDS

Numerical overcurrent and overload relays, overcurrent protection relays.

III. STANDARDS

The relays shall conform to IEC standards. Relays as per ANSI/IEEE standard
can be offered, subject, however to PPC approval.

IV. USE

The relay with separate overload and short-circuit protection will be used to
protect 20 KV, 3 X 4 MVAR shunt capacitor banks against overloading and all
types of short circuits.

V. OPERATING CONDITIONS

1. Installation : Indoors, inside a relay kiosk.

2. Limits of ambient temperature


during operation. : - 10 C to +45 C

3. Altitude : Up to 1000 m above sea level

1
VI. PPC’s 20 KV ELECTRIC SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS

1. Nominal Voltage (phase to phase) : 20 KV

2. Maximum Operating Voltage


(phase to phase) : 24 KV

3. Number of phases : 3

4. Nominal Frequency : 50 Hz

5. Short Circuit level : 10 KA

6. Basic Insulation level : 150 KV

7. The 20 KV system is grounded


via a 12 Ω resistor

8. Available auxiliary D.C. supply voltage : 110 V DC

VII. REQUIRED PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF THE RELAY

1. Inverse – time overcurrent protection for all phase and ground faults.
The short – circuit protection shall be set above 3 X IN, where IN ~ 350 A
IN = Shunt Capacitor bank current.
The time relay shall be set at 5 to 7 cycles. Given the fact that the capacitors shall
be switched via control switching relays, the expected inrush current shall be of
the order of (35-45)XIN where IN ~ 350 A.

2. Overload protection (overcurrent) for definite time.


The overload protection shall be set in the range of 1.3 to 1.4 times the rated
current of the capacitor bank (IN ~ 350 A). The time delay shall be set long
enough in order to avoid false tripping during switching (at about 5 – 7 cycles,
that is from 100 ms to 140 ms).

3. The characteristic curves of the inverse time for overcurrent protection shall be in
accordance with IEC 60255 – 3, which are inverse time, very inverse time,
extremely inverse time and long inverse time.

VIII. PROTECTIVE ARRANGEMENT

Since the capacitor bank is solidly grounded, the total current (phases and ground)
will be derived from the phase currents by means of the Holmgreen circuit indicated
below in Fig. No 1.

2
BR

Fig. No 1

IX. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAY

1. Rated input current (In) (from the CTs) : 5A

2. Rated frequency : 50 Hz

3. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : 110 V DC

4. Setting ranges
a. Definite – time overloading protection
- phase currents IA, IB, IC (I>)
- earth (ground) current IE.(IE>)

1. Phases : (0.5 to 4)XIn in steps of 0,1A


2. Earth : (0.1 to 3) x In in steps of 0,1A
3. Delay time
(for phases and earth) : 0.01 to 20 seconds in steps
of 0.01 sec.

b. Inverse time overcurrent protection (for phases + earth, I>> & IE>>)
Setting ranges
1. Phases : (0,5 to 4) x In in steps of 0.1A
2. Earth : (0,1 to 3) x In in steps of 0.1A
3. Time multiplier
(for phases + earth) : 0.05 – 1,0 sec (IEC) or
0,5-15sec (ANSI)

5. Τhermal current withstand


a. 3xIn continuous
b. 100xIn for one (1) second

3
X. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED FEATURES OF THE RELAY

1. Type of relay : Numerical with definite and inverse time overcurrent with two
overcurrent stages for phase (I> and I>>) and two for earth (IE> and IE>>).

2. The relay shall be suitable for flush panel mounting.

3. The relay terminals must be suitable to be wired with 2.5 mm2 size conductors and
of the screw type.

4. Setting of parameters shall be accomplished via keypad and display.

5. The relay shall be equipped with event and fault recording capability.

6. The relay shall will be preferably equipped with a port for PC connection.

7. The relay will be equipped with port for system interfacing via IEC
60870 – 5 – 103 protocol or IEC-61850 or Profibus-Fms, or Modbus/RTU or
DNP3.0.

8. Binary Outputs
The relay shall be equipped with the following outputs :

a. Number of trip contacts : 1 NO

b. Continuous current rating


of the trip contacts : 5A

c. Current rating of the trip contacts


for 0.5 sec : 30 A

d. Switching making capacity of the


trip contacts : 5 A at 110 V DC

e. Number of alarm contacts : 4, NO programmable

f. Continuous current rating


of the alarm contacts : 1A

XI. TESTS

A. Routine Tests

1. Power frequency voltage withstand test :


2 KV rms, 50 Hz, 1 minute as per IEC 60255 – 5.

4
B. Type Tests

1. Impulse voltage withstand test :


5KV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at internals
of 5 sec as per IEC 60255 – 5.

2. High Frequency test :


2.5 KV peak, 1 M Hz, τ = 15 ms,
400 pulses /seconds, duration = 2 sec
as per IEC 60255 – 22 – 1, class III.

3. Fast Transient interference test :


4 KV, 5/50 ns, 5 KHz, burst length = 15 ms,
repetition rate 300 ms : both polarities,
duration = 1 min as per IEC 60255 – 22 – 4
and IEC 61000 – 4 – 4, class IV.

XII. DATA TO BE SUBMITTED BY BIDDERS

1. Bidders must provide all information requested in “ATTACHMENT A” of


this hereby technical description.
Failure on the bidder’s part to comply with this request will be taken as
sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

2. Technical pamphlets and brochures which will help the evaluation process.

3. Outline and wiring drawings of the offered relay including mounting


instructions.

4. Any type test certificates for the type tests specified in this hereby technical
description.

XIII. PACKING

The relays shall be packed inside robust paper boxes, proper for this type of
equipment.
One relay per box.

5
“ATTACHMENT A”

NUMERICAL OVERCURRENT AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION RELAYS


TO BE USED IN CONJUCTION WITH 20 KV SHUNT CAPACITOR BANKS

Data which must be provided by all bidders. Failure to comply will result in rejection of the
offer.

1. Type and manufacturer of the relay : ………………………………….

2. Temperature operating limits of the relay : ………………………………….

3. Rated input current : …………………………………..

4. Rated frequency : ………………………………….

5. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : …………………………………..

6. Overcurrent protection of definite time : ……………………………………


Setting ranges : ………………………………….
a.. Phase : ……………………………………
b. Earth : ……………………………………
c. Delay time : ……………………………………

7. Inverse time overcurrent protection


Setting range : …………………………………..
a. Phase : …………………………………..
b. Earth : …………………………………..
c. Time multiplier : ………………………………….
d. Reset Ratio : ......................................................

8. Is the relay suitable for flush panel


mounting ? : ………………………………….

9. Are the ralay terminals suitable to be


wired with 2.5 mm2 size conductors? : …………………………………

10. How is parameterization accomplished ? : …………………………………

11. Is the relay equipped with event and fault


recording capability ? : …………………………………

12. Is the relay equipped with a port for PC


connection ? : ………………………………...

13. Is the relay equipped with a port for

6
system interfacing via IEC 60870-5-
103 protocol or IEC-61850 or
Profibus-Fms or Modbus/RTU or DNP3.0? : ………………………………...

14. Binary Outputs

a. Are the trip contacts programmable? : …………………………………..

b. Number of trip contacts and type : …………………………………..

c. Continuous current rating of the trip


contacts : …………………………………

d. Current rating of the trip contacts


for 0.5 sec : …………………………………

e Switching making capacity of the trip


contacts at 110 V DC : ………………………………...

f. Are the alarm contacts programmable : …………………………………

g. Number of alarm contacts : ………………………………...

h. Continuous current rating of the alarm


contacts : ………………………………..

15. Power consumption of the relay in VA : ……………………………….

16. Weight of the relay : ………………………………..

17. Are the relay terminals of the screw type? : ...................................................

18. Thermal current withstand

a. continuous : ...................................................

b. For one (1) second : ...................................................

IIδ / pm / AG/ March 2004


IIδ / revision No.2/pm/AG/June 2005
IIδ / revision No.3/pm/AG/August 2005
IIδ / revision No.4/pm/AG/ March 2006

7
PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION S.A.
T/NPRD/SUBSTATION & SWITCHING STATION
SPECIFICATIONS AND EQUIPMENT SECTION

September 2004

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION TD-46

VOLTAGE RELAYS
SUPPLIED FROM SINGLE-PHASE VT LOCATED IN THE NEUTRAL OF
A 30KV, 50MVAR SHUNT REACTOR FOR THE DETECTION OF
OVERVOLTAGE CONDITIONS

I. SCOPE

This hereby technical description covers PPC’s requirements regarding


functional features, technical characteristics and testing of voltage relays.

II. KEYWORDS

Voltage relays, overvoltage relays.

III. STANDARDS

The relays shall conform to IEC standards.

IV. USE

The voltage relays are used for the detection of overvoltage conditions in the
neutral of a 30KV, 50MVAR shunt reactors and thus protecting the shunt
reactors against earth faults.
The single phase voltage transformer which feeds the voltage relay is of
30KV/ 3 /100/ 3 V ratio, and of rated burden of 200VA.

V. OPERATING CONDITIONS

1. Installation : Indoors, inside a relay kiosk.

2. Limits of ambient temperature


during service : - 10 oC to +45 oC

3. Altitude : Up to 1000 m above sea level

1
VI. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PPC’s 30 KV SYSTEM

1. Nominal Voltage (phase to phase) : 30 KV

2. Maximum Operating Voltage


(phase to phase) : 36 KV

3. Number of phases : 3

4. Nominal Frequency : 50 Hz

5. Short Circuit level : 20 KA

6. Basic Insulation level : 250 KV

7. Available auxiliary D.C. supply voltage : 220 V DC ± 10%

VII. REQUIRED PROTECTION FUNCTIONS SETTING


CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAY

The relay shall be equipped with overvoltage protection function and with the
following characteristics:

a. Setting range : From 50 to 130 V in


steps of 1V
b. Delay time : 0 to 10 sec in steps
of 0.1 sec
c. Inherent time delay to operate
(pick up time) : ≤ 50 ms
d. Reset time : ≤ 50 ms
e. Reset ratio : ≥ 95%

VIII. RELAY SETTINGS

1. The overvoltage element of the relay shall be set at a value little below of
the value of 100 / 3 V with the time delay being set at a value of about 0,3
– 1sec.

IX. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAY

1. Type : Numerical or digital with


input suitable for being
supplier a single phase
VT

2. Rated frequency : 50 Hz

2
3. Setting range : 50 – 130 V in steps of I V

4. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : 220V DC

5. Inputs (From VT) : The relay shall be supplied


via one (1) single phase
VT with nominal ratio of
30000 / 3 100 3 V.
Under normal operating
conditions, the voltage which
the voltage relay sees is
100/ 3 V. Under earth fault
conditions, the voltage which
relay sees will vary from 1.3
to 1.6 X100/ 3 V depending
on the fault location.

6. Outputs contacts : At least 2 NO

7. Continuous current rating of the output


contacts : 5A

8. Current rating of the output contacts for 200ms : 30 A

9. Switching making capacity of the output


contacts at 220 V DC : 4A

10. Switching breaking capacity of the output


contacts at 220 V DC : 0.2A

X. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED FEATURES OF THE RELAY

1. The relay shall be suitable for flush panel mounting.


2. The relay terminals shall be preferably of the screw type and they must be suitable
to be wired with 2.5 mm size conductors.
3. The relay shall be capable of interfacing via IEC-61850
4. The relay shall be equipped with fault recording capability.

XI. TESTS

A. Routine Tests

1. Power frequency voltage withstand test :


2 KV rms, 50 Hz, 1 minute as per IEC 60255 – 5.

3
B. Type Tests

1. Impulse voltage withstand test :


5KV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals
of 5 sec as per IEC 60255 – 5.

2. High Frequency test :


2.5 KV peak, 1 MHz, τ = 15 ms,
400 pulses /seconds, duration = 2 sec
as per IEC 60255 – 22 – 1, class III.

3. Fast Transient interference test :


2 KV, 5/50 ns, 5 KHz, burst length = 15 ms,
repetition rate = 300 ms, both polarities,
duration = 1 min as per IEC 60255 – 22 – 4 and IEC 61000-4-4 class III.

XII. DATA TO BE SUBMITTED BY BIDDERS

1. Bidders must provide all information required in “ATTACHMENT A” of


this hereby technical description.
Failure on the bidder’s part to comply with this request will be taken as
sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

2. Technical pamphlets and brochures which will help the evaluation process.

3. Outline and wiring drawings of the offered relay including mounting


instructions.

4. If the offered type of voltage relay is equipped with more than one (1) inputs
from VTs, then a drawing must de submitted in which the relay wiring must
be indicated for the supply of the relay from one single-phase VT.

5. Any type test certificates for the type tests specified in this hereby technical
description. Acceptance or not lies on PPC’s judgment.

XIII. PACKING

The relays shall be packed inside robust paper boxes proper for this type of
equipment.

4
“ATTACHMENT A”

VOLTAGE RELAYS
SUPPLIED FROM SINGLE PHASE VT LOCATED IN THE NEUTRAL OF
A 30KV, 50MVAR SHUNT REACTOR
FOR DETECTION OF OVERVOLTAGE CONDITIONS

1. Type and manufacturer of the relay : ………………………………..

2. Temperature operating limits of the relay : ………………………………..

3. Is overvoltage protection function


provided ? : ………………………………...

4. With regard the overvoltage function


a. Setting range : ………………………………...
b. Delay time : ………………………………...
c. Inherent time delay
(or pick up time) : ………………………………...
d. Reset time : ………………………………...
e. Reset ratio : ………………………………...

5. Rated frequency : …………………………………

6. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : …………………………………

7. Is the relay suitable to be supplied from


open for the detection of the residual of the
voltage? : ………………………………...

8. Number of output contacts : …………………………………

9. Continuous current rating of the output


contacts. : …………………………………

10. Current rating of the output contacts


for 200ms. : ....................................................

11. Switching making capacity of the output


contacts at 220 V DC. : ………………………………….

12. Switching breaking capacity of the output


contacts at 220V DC : ………………………………….

13. Is the relay suitable for flush panel


mounting? : ………………………………….

5
14. Are the relay terminals of the screw type
and suitable to be wired with 2.5 mm2
size conductors ? : …………………………………..

15. Power consumption of the voltage relay


in VA at 220 V DC. : …………………………………..

16. Is the relay equipped with fault recording


capability? : …………………………………..

17. Can the relay communicate via IEC-61850


Protocol? : ……………………………

18. Is relay of the numerical or the digital type : …………………………………..

19. Weight of the relay : …………………………………..

IIδ/pm/AG/17.9.2004

6
PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION S.A.
T/NPRD/SUBSTATION AND SWITCHING STATION
SPECIFICATIONS AND EQUIPMENT SECTION

November 2003

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION TD-48

NUMERICAL OVERCURRENT RELAYS


FOR AUTOTRANSFORMER WINDINGS PROTECTION

I. SCOPE

This hereby technical description covers PPC’s requirements regarding


functional features, technical characteristics and testing of numerical
overcurrent protection relays to be used for protection of 400/150/30KV,
280MVA autotransformer’s windings against phase and earth faults.

II. KEYWORDS

Relays, numerical overcurrent relays, protection relays.

III. STANDARDS

The relays shall conform to IEC standards. Relays as per ANSI/IEEE


standards can be offered, subject, however to PPC approval.

IV. USE

The relays will be used to protect the windings of 400/150/30KV, 280MVA


autotransformer against phase and earth faults.
The connection of the autotransformer is star-grounded/star grounded/delta
(tertiary).

V. OPERATING CONDITIONS

1. Installation : Indoors, inside a relay kiosk or


inside the switching station control
building.

2. Limits of ambient temperature


during operation. : - 5 oC to +45 oC

3. Altitude : Up to 1000 m above sea level

1
VI. PPC’s ELECTRIC SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
1. Nominal Voltage (phase to phase) : 400/150/30 KV

2. Maximum Operating Voltage


(phase to phase) : 420/170/36 KV

3. Number of phases : 3

4. Nominal Frequency : 50 Hz

5. Short Circuit level : 40/30/20KA

6. Basic Insulation level : 1550/750/250 KV

7. Available auxiliary D.C. supply voltage : 220 V DC ± 10%

VII. REQUIRED PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF THE RELAY

Overcurrent protection phase + earth of definite time with two (2) stages of
overcurrent.

VIII. CONNECTION OF THE RELAY TO THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Since the CTs which are used for the protection of the autotransformer windings
(400, 150 & 30KV) are connected star(wye)-grounded, the earth fault current,
beyond that of the phases, could be measured by means of the Holmgreen circuit,
indicated below in Fig. No 1.

BR relay

Fig. No 1

IX. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAY

1. Type of relay : Numerical

2. Rated input current (In) (from the CTs) : 1A

3. Rated frequency : 50 Hz

2
4. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : 220 V DC

5. Overcurrent protection setting Ranges

a. Definite – time

1. phase I> : (0.5-4)xIN in steps of 0.1A


2. earth IE> : (0.5-4)xIN in steps of 0.1A
3. phase I>> : (0.5-8)xIN in steps of 0.1A
4. earth IE >> : (0.5-8)xIN in steps of 0.1A
5. Delay time : 0-30 sec in steps of 0.1
where IN=1A

X. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED FEATURES OF THE RELAY

1. The relay shall be suitable for flush panel mounting.

2. The relay terminals shall be preferably of the screw type and they must be
suitable to be wired with 2.5 mm2 size conductors.

3. Setting of parameters shall be accomplished via keypad and display.

4. Binary Output contacts


The relay shall be equipped with the following output contacts :

a. Number of contacts for tripping : 2 NO for I> & IE> and


2 NO for I>> & IE>>

b. Continuous current rating of the contacts


for tripping : 5A

c. Current rating of the contacts for tripping


for 0.5 sec : 30 A

d. Switching breaking capacity of the


tripping contacts : 0,15 A at 220V DC

e. Number of alarm contacts : 2NO or 2 CO


one for I> & IE>
and one for I>> & IE>>

f. Continuous current rating of the contacts


of the alarm : 1A

3
XI. TESTS

A. Routine Tests

1. Power frequency voltage withstand test :


2 KV rms, 50 Hz, 1 minute as per IEC 60255 – 5.

B. Type Tests

1. Impulse voltage withstand test :


5KV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at internals
of 5 sec as per IEC 60255 – 5.

2. High Frequency test :


2.5 KV peak, 1 M Hz, τ = 15 ms,
400 pulses /seconds, duration = 2 sec
as per IEC 60255 – 22 – 1, class III.

3. Fast Transient interference test :


4 KV, 5/50 ns, 5 KHz, burst length = 15 ms,
repetition rate 300 ms : both polarities,
duration = 1 min as per IEC 60255 – 22 – 4
and IEC 61000 – 4 – 4, class IV.

4. Mechanical Vibration stress test


60-150Hz, 0,5g acceleration, sweep rate: 1 octave/min, 20 cycles in 3
orthogonal axes as per IEC 60255-21-1 and 60068-2-6.

XII. COMMUNICATIONS

a. The relay shall be capable of communicating with an automated


substation control and protection system via IEC protocol 60870-5-103
and also preferably via one of the following protocols : Profibus-fms,
Lon, Modbus/RTU or DNP.3 .
b. The relay shall be equipped with a port for PC communication.
c. The relay shall be capable of being connected either with fiber optic
cable or special communication cable for the purposes of
communication with an automated substation control and protection
system.

XIII. FAULT RECORDING

The function of the Fault recording shall be used for recording of phase and
ground (earth) currents during fault conditions.
The recording will be initiated either by tripping signal or by pick up.
Total recording time : 3sec at least.

4
XIV. DATA TO BE SUBMITTED BY BIDDERS

1. Bidders must provide all information requested in “ATTACHMENT A” of


this hereby technical description.
Failure on the bidder’s part to comply with this request will be taken as
sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

2. Technical pamphlets and brochures which will help the evaluation process.

3. Outline and wiring drawings of the offered relay including mounting


instructions.

4. Any type test certificates for the type tests specified in this hereby technical
description.

XV. PACKING

The relays shall be delivered packed properly inside robust paper boxes,
proper for this type of equipment.
One relay per box.

5
“ATTACHMENT A”

NUMERICAL OVERCURRENT RELAYS


TO BE USED FOR AUTOTRANSFORMER WINDINGS PROTECTION

Data which must be provided by all bidders. Failure to comply will result in rejection of the
offer.

1. Type and manufacturer of the relay : ………………………………….

2. Temperature operating limits of the relay : ………………………………….

3. Rated input current : …………………………………..

4. Rated frequency : ………………………………….

5. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : …………………………………..

6. Overcurrent setting ranges

a. Overcurrent I> range : …………………………………...


b. Overcurrent IE> range : …………………………………...
c. Delay time : ……………………………………

a. Overcurrent I>> range : …………………………………...


b. Overcurrent IE>> range : …………………………………...
c. Delay time : ……………………………………

7. Is the relay suitable for flush panel


mounting ? : ………………………………….

8. Are the relay terminals of the screw type


and suitable to be wired with 2.5 mm
size conductors ? : …………………………………

9. How is parameterization accomplished ? : …………………………………

10. Is the relay equipped with event and fault


recording capability ? : …………………………………

11. Is the relay equipped with a port for PC


connection ? : ………………………………...

12. Is the relay equipped with a port for


system interfacing via IEC 60870-5-
103 protocol ? : ………………………………...

13. Is the communication possible via

6
other protocols? : ………………………………...

14. Binary Contacts

a. Number of tripping contacts : ………………………………...

b. Continuous current rating of the


tripping contacts : …………………………………

c. Current rating of the tripping contacts


for 0.5 sec : …………………………………

d. Switching breaking capacity of the


tripping contacts at 220 V DC : ………………………………...

e. Number of alarm contacts : …………………………………

f. Continuous current rating of the


alarm contacts : ………………………………..

15. Power consumption of the relay in VA : ……………………………….

16. Weight of the relay : ………………………………..

17. Dimensions of the relay : ..........………………………...

ys/AG/ November 2003

7
PPC S.A.
T/NPRD / Substation & Switching station Specifications
and Equipment Section
November 2003

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION TD-49

OVERCURRENT RELAYS TO BE USED FOR


AUTOTRANSFORMER MASS PROTECTION

I. SCOPE

This hereby technical description covers PPC’s requirements regarding functional


features, technical characteristics and testing of single phase overcurrent relays.

II. KEY WORDS

Relays, overcurrent relays.

III. STANDARDS

The relays shall conform to IEC standards. Relays as per ANSI/IEEE can be offered,
subject, however to PPC approval.

IV. USE

The relays will be used to protect against short circuit currents which can be developed
between autotransformer mass(tank) and earth.
The protected autotransformer is of ratio of 400/150/30KV, of apparent power of
280MVA and of connection of star-grounded/star-grounded/delta .
The relays are to be used in conjunction with CTs of ratio 200/5A.

-1-
V. OPERATING CONDITIONS

1. Installation : Indoors, inside a relay kiosk or the control


building, on metallic panel.

2. Limits of ambient
temperature during service : -5oC to +45oC

3. Altitude : Up to 1000 m above sea level

VI. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PPC’s 400KV, 150KV and 30KV


SYSTEM

1. Nominal Voltage (phase-to-phase) : 400/150/30KV


2. Maximum Operating Voltage (phase to : 420/170/36KV
phase)
3. Number of phases :3
4. Nominal frequency : 50Hz
5. Short Circuit level : 40/30/20kA
6. Basic Insulation level : 1550/750/250KV
7. Available auxiliary D.C. supply voltage : 220V D.C.

8. The system is solidly grounded


(earthed).

VII. REQUIRED PROTECTION FUNCTION OF THE RELAYS

Earth overcurrent Protection with definite time with two levels of overcurrent
(I Ε > and I Ε >>).

VIII. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAYS

1. Rated frequency : 50Hz


2. Rated input (In) : 5A
3. Setting range
Stage 1
I Ε > (time delay) : (0.5-4) x In in steps of 0.1A,
where In=5A
delay time : 0 to 20sec
Stage 2
I Ε >> (instantaneous) : (0.1-10) x In

-2-
delay time : 0-20 sec
4. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : 220V D.C. ± 10%
5. Number of output contacts for : Two (2) CO or NO for stage IE >
tripping and for stage I E >>.
6. Continuous current rating of the
output tripping contacts : 5A
7. Current rating of the output
tripping contacts for 0,5sec. : 30A
8. Switching breaking capacity of
the output tripping contacts at
220V D.C. : 0,15A
9. Number of output contacts for
alarm : 2 NO associated one with I Ε > and
one with I Ε >>
10. Continuous current rating of the
output contacts for alarm : 1A
11. Switching breaking capacity of
the output contacts for alarm at
220V DC : 0,15A

IX. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED FEATURES OF THE RELAYS

1. Type : Digital

2. Single-phase. A three phase relay can be accepted providing that it can be wired so
as to be excited by a phase to earth current.

3. The relay must be of reduced sensitivity for frequencies other than the fundamental
so as to prevent undesired operations.

4. The relay shall be suitable for flush panel mounting.

5. The relay terminals shall be suitable to be wired with 2,5mm2 size conductors.

X. COMMUNICATIONS

a. The relay shall be capable for communicating with an automated substation control
and protection system, via IEC protocol 60870-5-103, and also preferably via one
of the following protocols : Profibus-fms, Lon, Mobus/RTU or DNP.3 .
b. The relay shall be equipped with a port for PC connection.

-3-
c. The relay shall be capable of being connected either with fiber optic cable or
special communication cable for the purposes of communication with an automated
substation control and protection system.

XI. FAULT RECORDING

The function of the fault recording shall be used for recording of phase and ground
(earth) currents during fault conditions.
The recording will be initiated either by tripping signal or by pick up.
Total recording time : 3sec at least

XII. TESTS

A. Routine Tests

1. Power frequency voltage withstand test: 2KV rms, 50Hz, 1 minute as per IEC
60255-5

B. Type Tests

1. Impulse voltage withstand test


5KV, 1,2/50µs, 0,5J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals of 5sec as
per IEC 60255-5.

2. High frequency test:


2,5KV peak, 1MHz, τ=15ms, 400 pulses/sec, duration=2sec as per IEC 60255-
22-1, Class III.

3. Fast transient interference test:


4KV, 5/50ns, 5kHz, burst length=15ms, repetition rate=300ms, both polarities,
duration=1minute as per IEC-60255-22-4, class IV.

XI. DATA TO BE SUBMITTED BY ALL BIDDERS

1. Bidders must provide all information requested in “ATTACHMENT A” of this


hereby technical description. Failure on the bidder’s part to comply with this request
will be taken as sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

2. Technical pamphlets and brochures that will help the evaluation process.

-4-
3. Outline and wiring drawings of the offered relay including mounting instructions.

4. If a three phase relay is offered (phase + earth), a connection diagram must be


provided indicating as how the relay is going to be connected so that it can be
excited by the phase to earth current.

5. Any type test certificates for the type test specified in this hereby technical
description. Acceptance or not of these certificates lies on PPC’s judgment.

XII. PACKING

The relays shall be delivered packed properly inside robust paper boxes, proper for this
type of equipment.
One relay per box.

-5-
“ATTACHMENT A”
OVERCURRENT RELAYS TO BE USED FOR AUTOTRANSFORMER MASS
PROTECTION

1. Type and manufacturer of the relay : ..................................


.....................................
2. Is the relay overcurrent of definite time? : ..................................
3. Temperature operating limits of the relay : ..................................

4. Setting range
A. stage 1, I Ε > : ..................................
In steps of : ..................................
Delay time : ..................................
B. stage 2, I Ε >> : ..................................
In steps of : ..................................
Delay time : ..................................
5. Rated Input : ..................................

6. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : ..................................

7. Number of output contacts for tripping : ..................................

8. Continuous current rating of the output tripping contacts : ..................................

9. Current rating of the output tripping contacts for 0,5 second : ..................................

10. Switching breaking capacity of the output tripping contacts at : ..................................


220V D.C.
11. Number of output contacts for alarm : ..................................

12. Continuous current rating of the output contacts for alarm : ..................................

13. Switching breaking capacity of the output contacts for alarm at : ..................................
220V D.C.
14. Rated frequency : ..................................

15. Power consumption of the relay in VA : ..................................

16. Is the offered relay of reduced sensitivity for frequencies other


than the fundamental so as to prevent undesired operations? : ..................................

-6-
17. Is the relay suitable for surface panel mounting? : ..................................

18. Are the relay terminals suitable to be wired with 2,5mm2 size
conductors? : ..................................

19. Weight of the relay : ..................................

20. Dimensions of the relay : ..................................

21. Is the relay single phase or three-phase (phase + earth)? : ..................................

ys/AG/ November 2002

-7-
PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION S.A.
NPRD/SUBSTATION-SWITCHING STATION
SPECIFICATIONS & EQUIPMENT SECTION

January 2006

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Νο 50/7


REVISION No.7

PHASE+EARTH OVERCURRENT RELAY OF DEFINITE AND INVERSE


TIME WITH AUTO-RECLOSING FUNCTION FOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE
OVERHEAD DISTRIBUTION LINES

Ι. SCOPE
This hereby technical description covers PPC’s requirements regarding
technical and operating features and also testing of phase and earth overcurrent
relays of definite and inverse time with auto-reclosing function. The relays
should be equipped with phase and earth overcurrent protection and auto-
reclosing function suitable for one rapid auto-reclosing and at least two
sequential adjustable time delayed reclosings.

ΙΙ. KEY WORDS


Relays, phase and earth overcurrent relays with auto-reclosing, auto-reclosing
relays.

ΙΙΙ. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PPC’s 20kV SYSTEM


1. Nominal Voltage : 20 kV
2. Maximum Operating Voltage : 24 kV
(phase to phase)
3. Number of phases :3
4. Nominal frequency : 50 Hz
5. Basic Insulation Level : 125 kV crest
6. Sort Circuit Level :10 kA
7. Method of earthing : The 20kV system is earthed
(grounded) via a 12Ω resistor

ΙV. USE
The relays will be used for the protection of medium voltage (20kV) overhead
distribution lines against phase and ground faults in conjunction with 3-pole
multiple-shot auto-reclosing.

IIδ/pm/AG/January 2006 1 TD-50-7a


V. STANDARDS
The phase and earth overcurrent protection auto-reclosing relays of definite
and inverse time, shall comply with IEC 60255-3, 60255-5 and 60255-22
Standards. Relays as per ANSI/IEEE can be offered, subject, however to
PPC’s approval.

VΙ. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAY

1. Type of relay
Numerical

2. Construction-Installation
The relay shall be in a case and must be suitable for flush panel mounting.

3. Degree of Protection of the relay’s case


IP51 as per IEC

4. Operating Conditions
a. Installation : Inside the control building of the substation
b. Ambient temperature : Minimum (-5οC)
Maximum (+40οC)
c. Altitude : Up to 1000m above sea level
d. Humidity : 5% - 85%

5. Terminals of the relay


The terminals of the relay shall be suitable to be wired with 2,5 mm2 size copper
conductors.

6. Auxiliary Voltage Supply


The relay will be supplied with 110V DC with +10%, -20% variation.

7. Rated current of the relay input


Input current: ΙΝ = 5 Α

8. Thermal withstand capability of the relay


a. 100 x IN for 1 sec
b. 40 x IN for 2 sec
c. (3 to 4) x IN continuous

9. Required protection functions of the relay


a. Definite time phase and earth overcurrent protection with two (2) stages for
phase and earth Ι>, Ι>> and ΙΕ>, ΙΕ >> respectavly. In total four (4) stages.
b. Inverse time phase and earth overcurrent protection with characteristic
curves as per IEC 60255-3, which are inverse time, very inverse time,
extremely inverse time and long inverse time with one overcurrent stage
for phase Ιp and one for earth ΙpΕ, respectively. Two, in total.
c. Auto-reclosing with three (3), at least, reclosings.

IIδ/pm/AG/January 2006 2 TD-50-7a


10. Required setting ranges of the relays
Α. Definite time overcurrent protection
a. phase (Ι>): ( 0,1 to 4) x IN in steps of 0,1A
b. earth (ΙΕ>): ( 0,05 to 1) x IN in steps of 0,1A
c. phase (Ι>>): ( 0,1 to 20) x IN in steps of 0,1A
d. earth (ΙΕ>>): ( 0,05 to 1) x IN in steps of 0,1A
e. time delay : 0 - 150 sec in steps of 0,1sec

Β. Inverse time overcurrent protection


a. phase (Ιp): ( 0,1 to 4) x IN in steps of 0,1A
b. earth (ΙpΕ): ( 0,1 to 1,0) x IN in steps of 0,1A
c. Time multiplier: 0,05 – 1,5 sec (IEC) or 0,5-15sec (ANSI)

C. Auto-reclosing

a. Setting range for the dead time during


the fast reclosing : 0.1–2 sec in steps of 0.01sec

b. Setting range for the dead time during


the first delayed reclosing : 0.5–15 sec minimum, in steps
of 0.5 sec
c. Setting range for the dead time during
the second delayed reclosing : 0.5–15 sec minimum, in steps
of 0.5 sec

d. Setting range for the reclaim (reset) time of


the relay after successful reclosing cycle : 1-300 sec in steps of 0.5 sec

11. Required characteristics and features of auto-reclosing


a. Number of reclosings (shots) : minimum three (3), one (1) for fast reclosing
and two (2) with delayed reclosings.

b. Mode of circuit breaker's


operation during auto-reclosing : 3-pole operation of the circuit breaker

c. Mode of operation of the auto-reclosing:


The relay must be suitable for selection of one of the following operation
functions, via keypad and also via PC:
- Auto-reclosing OFF. Reclosing is not possible.
- One fast and one delayed reclosing.
- One fast and two delayed reclosings

d. Description of the operation of the auto-reclosing:


In case of a fault (phase or earth), any of the stages of the definite time
function, or the the inverse time function shall be activated based on the

IIδ/pm/AG/January 2006 3 TD-50-7a


choice (setting) made by the user (PPC), and shall provide a tripping
command to the circuit breaker in time setted by PPC..
After that, the auto-reclosing function is either energized or not depending
on the overcurrent stage which was initially excited (which stage was
excited is determined by the settings of the user).

If the auto-reclosing function is energized, then it takes over, and after a


programmed time, it provides a closing command to the circuit breaker.
If the fault is still present, then any overcurrent stage of the definite time
function or inverse time function depending on the settings of the user
(PPC), shall assume control and a tripping command shall be provided to
the circuit breaker after a programmed time.
The auto-reclosing function provides again, after a programmed time, a
closing command to the circuit breaker. If the fault is still present, then any
overcurrent stage of the definite time function or inverse time function
depending on the settings of the user (PPC), again assumes control and
provides a tripping lock-out command to the circuit breaker, after of course,
a programmed time.

e. The relay shall be equipped with a timer of range 0-10sec, for blocking the
auto-reclosing function wherever the circuit breaker is manually closed.

f. The relay shall be equipped with operation counter for counting the rapid
and delayed reclosings.

12. Additional required inputs

The relay must have at least five (5) additional binary inputs at 110V D.C. for
inputs like the following:
a. Input from circuit breaker malfunction, for example loss of SF6 or
uncharged spring,
b. Input from control switch contact used for opening of the breaker,
c. Input from control switch contact used for closing the breaker,
d. Input for blocking of reclosing function from a remote place,
e. Input for blocking the phase and earth (ground) overcurrent definite time
instantaneous elements (I>> and ΙΕ>>) from remote place. In other words, the
disabling of the definite time overcurrent stage (I>> or IE>>), for all the time
that the auto-reclosing function is in operation.

IIδ/pm/AG/January 2006 4 TD-50-7a


VII OUTPUT CONTACTS FOR CONTROL AND SIGNALING
Α. Control (command) output contacts (heavy duty)

The relay shall be equipped with the following number of control (command)
contacts and with the following technical characteristics.

a. Number of contacts with regard the phase and earth stages of the definite
time and inverse time overcurrent functions shall be as follows:
One (1) NO contact and
One (1) NO contact for making through the autoreclosing function

b. Technical characteristics of control (command) contacts

Continuous rated current 5Α


Short time current rating
30 Α for 0,5 sec
(Making capability)
Breaking capability at 110 V D.C. ≥0,25 Α

Β. Alarm output contacts

The relay shall be equipped with the following number of alarm contacts:
a. Number of contacts with regard the definite time and inverse time
overcurrent function shall be as follows:

Phase (Ι> and I>>) 1 NO


Earth (ΙΕ > and IE>>) 1 NO
Phase (Ιp) 1 NO
Earth (ΙpΕ >) 1 NO

In other words, four (4) contacts defined as above or programmable by the


user.

b. Number of contacts with regard the auto-reclosing function: 1 ΝΟ


-One for indicating that the autoreclosing function has been blocked

Total number of alarm contacts: five (5)

c. Technical characteristics of the alarm contacts

Continuous rated current 1Α


Short time current rating 8 Α for 0,5
(Making capability) sec
Breaking capability at 110 V D.C. 0,25 Α

IIδ/pm/AG/January 2006 5 TD-50-7a


VIII. REQUIRED DIMENSIONS OF THE RELAY

The following dimensions are valid only when the inquiry concerns
individual relays. The dimensions are not of importance when the inquiry
concerns metalclad switchgear panels.

The dimensions of the relay shall be as follows:

• For width smaller than 12cm, the maximum height shall be 40cm.
• For width between 12cm and 19cm, the maximum height shall be
25cm.
• The width and depth of the relay shall not exceed in any case 19cm and
30cm respectively.
• All the terminals of the relay must be located at its rear side.

IX. TESTS
Α. Routine Tests (as per IEC 60255-5)
1. Power frequency voltage test : 2 kV rms, 50 Hz

Β. Type Tests
1. Impulse voltage test : 5 kV crest, 1.2/50µs,0.5J
(as per IEC 60255-5) 3 positive and 3 negative
pulses in 5 sec intervals

2. High frequency test : 2.5 kV crest, 1MHz,


( as per IEC 60255-22-1) t=15ms, 400 pulses/sec,
duration=2 seconds

3. Fast transient test : 2 kV 5/50 ns, 5 kHz,


(as per IEC 60255-22-4 and 61000-4-4) pulse duration 15 sec,
iteration rate :
1 /300 ms for 1 minute

4. Mechanical vibration test : 60-150 Hz, 0,5g acceleration


during operation sweep rate : 1 octave / minute
(as per IEC 60255-21-1 and 60068-2-6) 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.

5. Electrostatic discharge test


(as per IEC 60255-22-2, class IV) : 8 kV contact discharge, 15kV
air gap discharge, both
polarities, 150pF, Ri=330Ω

IIδ/pm/AG/January 2006 6 TD-50-7a


Χ. COMMUNICATION
a. The relay shall be capable for communicating via a RS485 port with a
substation automation system via IEC protocol 61850 οr ΙΕC 60870-5-103 or
via one of the following protocols : Profibus-fms, or Modbus/RTU or DNP3.0
b. The relay shall be equipped with a RS 232 port for PC interfacing.
c. Together with the relay, the supplier must provide any software needed for the
setting and communication of the relay with a PC and a substation automation
system (3 copies)
d. Together with the relay, the supplier must provide five (5) cables at least for
the communication of the relay with PC

ΧI. FAULT RECORDING


The function of the fault recording, event and oscillographic, shall be used for
recording of phase and ground (earth) currents during fault conditions.
- The recording will be initiated either by tripping signal or by pick up.
- Total recording time : 3sec at least
- Resolution for events: 1ms

ΧΙI. DATA TO BE SUBMITTED BY ALL BIDDERS


a. Wiring and dimensional (outline) drawings
Bidders are requested to admit along with their offers outline drawings of the
Relay, wiring diagrams, all the necessary diagrams for the understanding of
the Relay’s operations (specially for the definite, inverse time and auto-
reclosing function), technical brochures and data essential for the complete
description of the relay offered.

b. Completion of “Attachment A”. Failure to comply or inadequate completion


will constitute sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

c. Any type test certificates for the type test specified in this hereby technical
description. Acceptance or not of these certificates lies on PPC’s judgment.

XIII. PACKING
The relays shall be delivered packed properly inside robust paper boxes,
proper for this type of equipment.
One relay per box.

IIδ/pm/AG/January 2006 7 TD-50-7a


ATTACHMENT ‘Α’

Information by the Bidders. Failure to comply will result in rejection of the offer.

1. Type and manufacturer of the relay : ..................................


..................................
2. Is the relay equipped with definite time and inverse time phase +
earth overcurrent protection and auto-reclosing functions? : ..................................

3. Is the auto-reclosing function suitable for one rapid reclosing and : ..................................
at least two sequential delayed reclosings?

4. Degree of protection of the relay case? : ..................................

5. Operation temperature category of the relay : ..................................

6. Altitude : ..................................

7. Humidity : ..................................

8. Type of the terminals of the relay : ..................................

9. Are the terminals of the relay suitable to be wired with 2,5 mm2
size copper conductors? : ..................................

10. Auxiliary Voltage Supply of the relay : ..................................

11.Rated current of the relay input : ..................................

12.Thermal withstand capability of the relay


a. Continuous : ..................................
b. For 2 sec : ..................................
c. For 1 sec : ..................................
13. Does the offered relay comply with the requirements of
paragraph VI – 9 of this hereby technical description? : ..................................

IIδ/pm/AG/January 2006 8 TD-50-7a


14.Setting ranges of the relay : ..................................

Α. Overcurrent of definite time


a. phases (Ι>) : ..................................
b. earth (ΙΕ>) : ..................................
c. phase (Ι>>) : ..................................
d. earth (ΙΕ>>) : ..................................
e. time delay : ..................................

Β. Overcurrent of inverse time


a. phases (Ιp) : ..................................
b. earth (ΙpΕ) : ..................................

e. time multiplier : ..................................

C. Auto-reclosing
a. Setting range of the dead time : ..................................
during the first rapid reclosing
b. Setting range of the dead time
during the first delayed reclosing : ..................................
c. Setting range of the dead time
during the second delayed reclosing : ..................................
d. Setting range of the reclaim (reset) time of
the relay after a successful reclosing cycle : ..................................

15.Required characteristics of the autoreclosing


a. Is the isolation of the auto-reclosing function possible? : ..................................
b. Is the relay suitable for one rapid reclosing and one delayed
reclosing? : ..................................
c. Is the relay suitable for one rapid reclosing and two delayed
reclosings? : ..................................
d. Number of reclosings : ..................................
e. Is the relay equipped with a counter for counting the rapid and
delayed reclosings? : ..................................

16. Characteristics of the control (command) contacts.


a. Number of contacts related to the phase and earth stages of the : ..................................
definite and inverse time overcurrent elements : ..................................
b. Number of auto-reclosing contacts : ..................................
c. Rated current of the control (command) contacts
d. Short time current rating (0.5sec) of the control (command)
contacts : ..................................
e. Breaking capability of the control (command) contacts at 110 V
D.C. : ..................................

IIδ/pm/AG/January 2006 9 TD-50-7a


17.Characteristics of the alarm contacts
: ..................................
a. Number of alarm contacts: : ..................................
b. Are the alarm contacts freely programmble : ..................................
c. Rated current of the alarm contacts : ..................................
d. Short-time current (0,5sec) rating of the alarm contacts : ..................................
e. Breaking capability of the alarm contacts at 110 V D.C. : ..................................

18. Does the relay cover the requirements in paragraph Χ of this


technical description? : ..................................
a. Is the relay equipped with RS232 ports? : ..................................
b. Can the relay communicate via IEC 61850 protocol or IEC
60870-5-103 or Profibus-fms or Modbus/RTU or DNP.3? : ..................................

19. Does the relay cover the requirements in paragraph ΧI of this


technical description? : ..................................
a. Is the relay capable of event and oscillographic recording? : ..................................
b. Maximum recording time : ..................................
c. Resolution of events : ..................................

20.Detailed description of all the additional inputs of the relay : …...............................


…...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................

21.Power consumption of the relay in VA : ..................................

22.Weight of the relay : ..................................

23.Outline dimensions of the relay : ..................................

24. Is the relay suitable for panel flush mounting? : …...............................

25. Is the relay equipped with a key pad and RS232 port for setting
and parameterization purposes? : …...............................

IIδ/pm/AG/January 2006 10 TD-50-7a


26. Does the offered relay comply in full with the requirements of
paragraph VI-11 of this technical description? : …...............................
…...............................
(If not, indicate which requirements are not covered) …...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................

27. Does the offered relay comply in full with the requirements of
paragraphs VI-12 of this technical description? : …...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................

28. Is the required software for the relay settings and communication
provided? : …...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................

29. Αre five (5) cables for the communication of the relay with PC
provided? : …...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................
…...............................

js/AG/October 2003
Rev. No.1/ pm/ AG/ March 2005
Rev. No.2/ pm/ AG/ July 2005
Rev. No.3/ bk/ AG/ August 2005
Rev. No.4/ sp/ AG/ September 2005
Rev. No.5/ sp/ AG/ October 2005
Rev. No.6/ pm/ AG/ November 2005
Rev. No.7/ pm/ AG/ January 2006

IIδ/pm/AG/January 2006 11 TD-50-7a


111

PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION S.A.


NPRD/SUBSTATION-SWITCHING STATION
SPECIFICATIONS & EQUIPMENT SECTION

January 2006

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Νο 51/4


REVISION No 4
PHASE + EARTH OVERCURRENT RELAY OF DEFINITE AND INVERSE
TIME FOR BACK-UP PROTECTION OF 20KV SUBSTATION BUSES AND
OVERHEAD DISTRIBUTION LINES OF MEDIUM VOLTAGE (20KV) AND
ALSO AS MAIN PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION
FEEDERS

Ι. SCOPE

This hereby technical description covers PPC’s requirements regarding


technical and operating features and also testing of phase and earth overcurrent
relays of definite and inverse time.

ΙΙ. KEY WORDS


Relays, phase and earth overcurrent relays.

ΙΙΙ. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PPC’s 20kV SYSTEM

1. Nominal Voltage :20 kV


2. Maximum Operating Voltage :24 kV
(phase to phase)
3. Number of phases :3
4. Nominal frequency :50 Hz
5. Basic Insulation Level :125 kV crest
6. Sort Circuit Level :10 kA
7 Method of earthing (grounding) :The 20KV system is grounded
through a 12Ω resistor
8. Available D.C. auxiliary
voltage supply :110V D.C.
7. Available A.C. auxiliary
voltage supply :230/400V A.C

ΙV. USE

The relays will be used for the back-up protection of medium voltage (20kV)
overhead distribution lines and the 20KV bus bars of the substation against
phase and earth (ground) faults. The relays can also be used as main protection
for underground distribution feeders (20kV) against phase and earth faults.

1 TD-51
222

V. STANDARDS
The phase and earth overcurrent protection relays of definite and inverse time,
shall comply to the IEC 60255-3, 60255-5 and 60255-22 Standards. Relays as
per ANSI/IEEE can be offered, subject, however to PPC’s approval.

VΙ. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAY

1. Type of relay
Numerical

2. Construction-Installation
The relay shall be in a case and must be suitable for flush panel mounting.

3. Degree of Protection of the relay’s case


IP51 as per IEC

4. Operating Conditions
a. Installation : Inside the control building of the substation
b. Ambient temperature : Minimum (-5οC)
Maximum (+40οC)
c. Altitude : Up to 1000m above sea level
d. Humidity : 5% - 85%

5. Terminals of the relay


The terminals of the relay shall be suitable to be wired with 2,5 mm2 size copper
conductors.

6. Auxiliary Voltage Supply


The relay will be supplied with 110V DC with +10%, -20% variation.

7. Input Current of the relay


Input current: ΙΝ = 5 Α

8. Thermal withstand capability of the relay

a. 100x IN for 1 sec


b. 40x IN for 2 sec
c. (3 to 4) x IN continuous

9. Required protection functions of the relay

a. Definite time Phase and earth overcurrent protection with two (2) stages for
phase and earth Ι>, Ι>> and ΙΕ>, ΙΕ >>.
b. Inverse time Phase and earth overcurrent protection with characteristic curves
as per IEC 60255-3, which are inverse time, very inverse time, extremely
inverse time and long inverse time with one overcurrent stage for phase (Ip)
and one for earth (IpΕ).

2 TD-51
333

10. Required setting ranges of the relays

Α. Definite time overcurrent protection


a. phases (Ι>): (0.1 to 4) x IN in steps of 0,1A
b. earth (ΙΕ>) : (0.05 to 1) x IN in steps of 0,1A
c. phases (Ι>>): (0.1 to 20) x IN in steps of 0,1A
d. earth (ΙΕ>>): (0,05 to 1) x IN in steps of 0,1A

e. time delay : 0 - 150 sec in steps of 0,1 sec

Β. Inverse time overcurrent protection


a. phases : (0,1 to 4) x IN in steps of 0,1A
b. earth : (0,05 to 1) x IN in steps of 0,1A

c. Time multiplier: 0,05 – 1,5 sec (IEC) or 0,5-15sec (ANSI)

11. Additional required inputs of the relays


At least one (1) binary input

VII OUTPUT CONTACTS FOR CONTROL AND SIGNALING


Α. Control output contacts (heavy duty)

The relay shall be equipped with the following number of heavy duty contacts
which shall be used for command purposes, with the following technical
characteristics.

a. The number of contacts with regard the phase and earth stages of the definite
time and inverse time overcurrent functions shall be as follows
One (1) NO contact

b. Technical characteristics of heavy duty contact

Continuous rated current 5Α


Short time current rating
30Α for 0,5 sec
(Making capability)
Breaking capability at 110 V D.C. 0,25Α

Β. Alarm output contacts

The relay shall be equipped with the following number of alarm contacts:

a. The number of contacts with regard the definite time and inverse time
overcurrent function shall be as follows

Phase (Ι> and I>>) 1 NO


Earth (ΙΕ > and IE>>) 1 NO
Phase (Ip) 1 NO
Earth (IpΕ ) 1 NO

3 TD-51
444

b. Technical characteristics of the alarm contacts

Continuous rated current 1Α


Short time current rating
8A for 0.5 sec
(Making capability)
Breaking capability at 110 V D.C. 0,25 Α

VIII. TESTS
Α. Routine Tests (κατά IEC 60255-5)
1. Power frequency voltage test : 2 kV rms, 50 Hz

Β. Type Tests
1. Impulse voltage test : 5 kV crest, 1.2/50µs,0.5J
(as per IEC 60255-5) 3 positive and 3 negative
pulses in 5 sec intervals

2. High frequency test : 2.5 kV crest, 1MHz,


(as per IEC 60255-22-1) t=15ms, 400 pulses/sec,
duration=2 seconds

3. Fast transient test : 2 kV 5/50 ns, 5 kHz,


(as per IEC 60255-22-4 and 61000-4-4) pulse duration 15 sec,
iteration rate :
1 /300 ms for 1 minute

4. Mechanical vibration test : 60-150 Hz, 0,5g acceleration


during operation sweep rate : 1 octave / minute
(as per IEC 60255-21-1 and 60068-2-6) 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.

5. Electrostatic discharge test : 8Kv contact discharge


(as per IEC 60255-22-2, class IV 15Kv air gap discharge, both
polarities 150pF, Ri=330Ω

IΧ. COMMUNICATION
a. The relay shall be capable for communicating via a RS485 port with a
substation automation system , via IEC protocol 61850, and or via one of the
following protocols : Profibus-fms,, Modbus/RTU or DNP 3.0 or IEC-60870
-5-103.
b. The relay shall be equipped with an RS232 port for PC interfacing.

Χ. FAULT RECORDING

4 TD-51
555

The function of the fault recording, event and oscillographic, shall be used for
recording of phase and ground (earth) currents during fault conditions.
- The recording will be initiated either by tripping signal or by pick up.
- Total recording time: 3sec at least
- Resolution for events: 1ms

ΧΙ. REQUIRED DIMENSIONS OF THE RELAY

The following dimensions are valid only when the inquiry concerns individual
relays. The dimensions are not of importance when the inquiry concerns
metalclad switchgear panels.
The dimensions of the relay shall be as follows:
• For width smaller than 12cm, the maximum height shall be 40cm
• For width between 12cm and 20cm, the maximum height shall be 30cm
• The width and depth of the relay shall not exceed in any case 20cm and
30cm respectively
• All the terminals of the relay must be located at its rear side

ΧΙI. DATA TO BE SUBMITTED BY ALL BIDDERS


a. Wiring and dimensional (outline) drawings
Bidders are requested to submit along with their offers outline drawings of the
relay, wiring diagrams, all the necessary diagrams for the understanding of the
relay’s operations (specially for the definite time and inverse time), technical
brochures and data essential for the complete description of the relay offered.

b. Completion of “Attachment A”. Failure to comply or inadequate completion


will constitute sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

c. Any type test certificates for the type test specified in this hereby technical
description. Acceptance or not of these certificates lies on PPC’s judgment.

XIII. PACKING
The relays shall be delivered packed properly inside robust paper boxes, proper
for this type of equipment.
One relay per box.

5 TD-51
666

ATTACHMENT ‘Α’

Information by the Bidders. Failure to fill or partial filling of the attachment shall
constitute sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

1. Type and manufacturer of the relay : ..................................


.....................................
2. Is the relay equipped with phase + earth overcurrent protection? : ..................................

3. Degree of protection of the relay case? : ..................................


4. Operation temperature category of the relay : ..................................
5. Altitude : ..................................
6. Humidity : ..................................
7. Type of the terminals of the relay : ..................................

8. Are the terminals of the relay suitable to be wired with 2,5 mm2
size copper conductors? : ..................................

9. Auxiliary Voltage Supply of the relay : ..................................

10. Rated current of the relay input : ..................................

11. Does the offered relay comply to the requirements of paragraph


VI – 9 of this hereby technical description? : ..................................

12. Setting ranges of the relay : ..................................

Α. Overcurrent of definite time


a. phase (Ι>) : ..................................
b. earth (ΙΕ>) : ..................................
c. phase (Ι>>) : ..................................
d. earth (ΙΕ>>) : ..................................

e. time delay : ..................................

Β. Overcurrent of inverse time


a. phases (Ιp) : ..................................
b. earth (ΙpΕ) : ..................................

c. time multiplier : ..................................

6 TD-51
777

13. Characteristics of the heavy duty contacts.


a. Number of contacts related to the phase and earth stages of the
definite and inverse time overcurrent : ..................................
b. Rated current of the heavy duty contacts : ..................................
c. Short time current rating (0.5sec) of the heavy duty contacts : ..................................
d. Breaking capability of the heavy duty contacts at 110 V D.C. : …...………………...

14. Characteristics of the alarm contacts


a. Number of contacts
Phase (Ι>) : ..................................
Earth (ΙΕ >) : ..................................
Phase (Ι>>) : ..................................
Earth (ΙΕ >>) : ..................................
Phase (Ip) : ..................................
Earth (IpΕ) : ..................................

b. Rated current of the alarm contacts : ..................................


c. Short-time current rating (0.5sec) of the alarm contacts during : ..................................
d. Breaking capability of the alarm contacts at 110 V D.C. : ..................................

15. Does the relay meet the requirements in paragraph IΧ of this


technical description?
a. Is the relay equipped with a RS232 port? : ..................................
b. Is the relay equipped with a RS485 port for communication via
Protocol IEC-61850 or IEC-60870-5-103 or Profibus-fms or
modbus/RTU or DNP 3.0 ? : ...................................
16. Does the relay cover the requirements in paragraph Χ of this
technical description? : ..................................
a. Total recording time : ..................................
b. Resolution of events : ..................................
17. Power consumption of the relay in VA : ..................................
18. Weight of the relay : ..................................
19. Outline dimensions of the relay : ..................................
20. Number of additional inputs of the relay : ..................................

Revision No.1 /pm/AG/March 2005


Revision No.2/pm/AG/July 2005
Revision No.3/pm/AG/October 2005
Revision No.4/pm/AG/January 2006

7 TD-51
PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION S.A.
T/NPRD/SUBSTATION & SWITCHING STATION
SPECIFICATIONS AND EQUIPMENT SECTION

February 2004

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION TD-52

VOLTAGE RELAYS
SUPPLIED FROM VTs CONNECTED IN “BROKEN (OPEN) DELTA”
FOR PROTECTION OF 30KV, 50 MVAR SHUNT REACTORS AGAINST
EARTH FAULTS

I. SCOPE

This hereby technical description covers PPC’s requirements regarding


functional features, technical characteristics and testing of voltage relays.

II. KEYWORDS

Voltage relays, overvoltage relays, residual voltage.

III. STANDARDS

The relays shall conform to IEC standards.

IV. USE

The voltage relays are used for the detection of earth faults for 30KV,
50MVAR shunt reactors of star (wye) connection and earthed not solidly but
via VT. The input of the voltage relay will be connected to the opening of the
΄΄ broken delta΄΄ which is crated by connecting the secondaries of the three
VTs in ΄΄ broken delta΄΄ .With this way, the residual voltage is detected and as
result of it, the conditions of the earth faults.
The VTs whose secondaries are connected in open delta are of ratio of
30KV/ 3 /100/3 V and their primaries are connected in star (wye) earthed
connection.

V. OPERATING CONDITIONS

1. Installation : Indoors, inside a relay kiosk.

2. Limits of ambient temperature


during service : - 10 oC to +45 oC

3. Altitude : Up to 1000 m above sea level

1
VI. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PPC’s 30 KV SYSTEM

1. Nominal Voltage (phase to phase) : 30 KV

2. Maximum Operating Voltage


(phase to phase) : 36 KV

3. Number of phases : 3

4. Nominal Frequency : 50 Hz

5. Short Circuit level : 20 KA

6. Basic Insulation level : 250 KV

7. Available auxiliary D.C. supply voltage : 220 V DC ± 10%

VII. REQUIRED PROTECTION FUNCTIONS SETTING


CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAY

The relay shall be equipped with overvoltage protection function and with the
following characteristics:

a. Setting range : From 20 to 130 V in


steps of 1V
b. Delay time : 0 to 10 sec in steps
of 0.1 sec
c. Inherent time delay to operate
(pick up time) : ≤ 50 ms
d. Reset time : ≤ 50 ms
e. Reset ratio : ≥ 95%

VIII. RELAY SETTINGS

1. The overvoltage element of the relay shall be set at a value little below of
the value of 100 /3V with the time delay being set at a value of about 0,3 –
1sec.

IX. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAY

1. Type : Numerical or digital with


Input for residual voltage

2. Rated frequency : 50 Hz

3. Setting range : 20 – 130 V in steps of I V

2
4. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : 220V DC

5. Inputs (From VTs) : The relay shall be supplied


via three (3) single phase
VTs with nominal ratio of
30000 / 3 100 V each.
The secondaries of the VTs
are connected in “broken
delta” connection and the
voltage relay will be
connected in the opening of
the delta. Under normal
operating conditions, the
voltage which the voltage
relay sees is zero. Under
earth fault conditions, the
voltage which relay sees will
vary from 33.3 V to 100 V
depending on the fault
location.

6. Outputs contacts : At least 4 NO

7. Continuous current rating of the output


contacts : 5A

8. Current rating of the output contacts for 0.5s : 30 A

9. Switching making capacity of the output


contacts at 220 V DC : 4A

10. Switching breaking capacity of the output


contacts at 220 V DC : 0.2A

X. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED FEATURES OF THE RELAY

1. The relay shall be suitable for flush panel mounting.


2. The relay terminals shall be preferably of the screw type and they must be suitable
to be wired with 2.5 mm size conductors.
3. The relay shall be capable of interfacing via IEC-61850 protocol.
4. The relay shall be equipped with fault recording capability.

3
XI. TESTS

A. Routine Tests

1. Power frequency voltage withstand test :


2 KV rms, 50 Hz, 1 minute as per IEC 60255 – 5.

B. Type Tests

1. Impulse voltage withstand test :


5KV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals
of 5 sec as per IEC 60255 – 5.

2. High Frequency test :


2.5 KV peak, 1 MHz, τ = 15 ms,
400 pulses /seconds, duration = 2 sec
as per IEC 60255 – 22 – 1, class III.

3. Fast Transient interference test :


2 KV, 5/50 ns, 5 KHz, burst length = 15 ms,
repetition rate = 300 ms, both polarities,
duration = 1 min as per IEC 60255 – 22 – 4 and IEC 61000-4-4 class III.

XII. DATA TO BE SUBMITTED BY BIDDERS

1. Bidders must provide all information required in “ATTACHMENT A” of


this hereby technical description.
Failure on the bidder’s part to comply with this request will be taken as
sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

2. Technical pamphlets and brochures which will help the evaluation process.

3. Outline and wiring drawings of the offered relay including mounting


instructions.

4. If the offered type of voltage relay is equipped with more than one (1) inputs
from VTs, then a drawing must de submitted in which the relay wiring must
be indicated for the detection of the residual voltage

5. Any type test certificates for the type tests specified in this hereby technical
description. Acceptance or not lies on PPC’s judgment.

XIII. PACKING

The relays shall be packed inside robust paper boxes proper for this type of
equipment.

4
“ATTACHMENT A”

VOLTAGE RELAYS
SUPPLIED FROM VTS CONNECTED IN BROKEN DELTA
FOR PROTECTION OF 30 KV, 50MVAR STUNT REACTORS AGAINST
EARTH FAULTS

1. Type and manufacturer of the relay : ………………………………..

2. Temperature operating limits of the relay : ………………………………..

3. Is overvoltage protection function


provided ? : ………………………………...

4. With regard the overvoltage function


a. Setting range : ………………………………...
b. Delay time : ………………………………...
c. Inherent time delay
(or pick up time) : ………………………………...
d. Reset time : ………………………………...
e. Reset ratio : ………………………………...

5. Rated frequency : …………………………………

6. Rated auxiliary supply voltage : …………………………………

7. Is the relay suitable to be supplied from


open for the detection of the residual of the
voltage? : ………………………………...

8. Number of output contacts : …………………………………

9. Continuous current rating of the output


contacts. : …………………………………

10. Current rating of the output contacts


for 0,5 sec. : ....................................................

11. Switching making capacity of the output


contacts at 220 V DC. : ………………………………….

12. Switching breaking capacity of the output


contacts at 220V DC : ………………………………….

13. Is the relay suitable for flush panel


mounting? : ………………………………….

5
14. Are the relay terminals of the screw type
and suitable to be wired with 2.5 mm2
size conductors ? : …………………………………..

15. Power consumption of the voltage relay


in VA at 220 V DC. : …………………………………..

16. Is the relay equipped with fault recording


capability? : …………………………………..

17. Can the relay communicate via


IEC-61850 protocol? : …………………………………..

18. Is the relay of the numerical or digital type? : …………………………………..

19. Weight of the relay : …………………………………..

IIδ/pm/AG/5.3.2004

6
PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION
TNPRD/SUBSTATION AND EHV SUBSTATION
SPECIFICATIONS & EQUIPMENT SECTION

December 2008

SPECIFICATION SS-55 / 8
NUMERICAL
BUSBAR DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION SYSTEM

I. SCOPE
This Specification covers the requirements concerning the general and
operating characteristics of a numerical busbar differential protection
system for installation in a busbar system consisting of one, two, or three
operating busbars, with or without bus coupler and bus sectionalizing
isolators or circuit breakers and as shown specifically on the single line
diagram for each substation (attached each time to the inquiry).

II. KEYWORDS
Protection, busbar protection, busbar differential protection.

III. USE
The busbar differential protection system shall be used to detect all kinds
of faults between phases and between phases and ground for 400kV or
150kV busbars.

I V. OPERATING CONDITIONS

1. Installation : Inside the substation’s control room.


2. Ambient temperature
- during installation : -5 to +50oC
- during storage : -25 to +55oC
3. Altitude : Up to 1000m above sea level.
4. Other conditions : Relative humidity: greater than 50%
5. Pollution level : Moderate.

V. ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS


The main data of the networks (to be specified in the inquiry) in which the
subject protection system shall be called upon to operate are the
following:
-2-

NETWORK 400kV 150kV

Nominal voltage 400kV 150kV


Max operation voltage 420kV 170kV
Number of phases 3 3
Frequency 50Hz 50Hz
Grounding Solidly earthed neutral Solidly earthed neutral
Short-circuit level 40kA at 420kV 31.5KA at 170kV
Three phase and single Three phase
C.B. reclosing duty cycle
phase. 0-0.3sec-co-3min-co
0-0,3sec-co-3min-co

VI . ELECTRIC AUXILIARY SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS


The available D.C. auxiliary supply voltage is 110V +10% -15% for 150kV
substations and 220V +10% -15% for 400kV switching stations.

VI I . MAIN CURRENT TRANSFORMERS


The busbar differential protection system shall be used in conjunction with
separate line CTs of unequal ratio. Data of the CTs will be shown in the
single line diagrams for each substation (included each time in the
inquiry).

VIII. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS, FUNCTIONS


AND ACCESSORIES OF THE BUSBAR DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION SYSTEM

1. Auxiliary (intermediate) current transformers.


Auxiliary current transformers must be provided for complete
galvanic and interference - free isolation of the internal processing
circuits from the measurement, control and supply circuits and for
the allowing of ratio matching, if matching of different main CT
ratios is required by the busbar protection system itself.
These auxiliary CTs can either be integral part of the busbar
protection system, or be located in a separate panel, or in the same
panel of the busbar protection system.

2. Tripping time.
Tripping time from occurrence of fault to energizing of circuit
breaker trip coil shall be ≤15msec for all kind of internal faults.

3. Stability - Selectivity.
The busbar differential protection system must be extreme stable
against external faults even in case of saturated CTs.
The protection system shall not respond at all to faults outside the
protected zone and shall only disconnect those busbars that are
affected by the fault.

ss-055/8a
-3-

4. Sensitivity.
High sensitivity for internal faults, adjustable and closely adapted to
the existing exploitation conditions. The sensitivity must be
basically unaffected by the number of feeders included in the
protective scheme.

5. Measuring principle: Low-impedance

6. Reliability.
The protection system must provide maximum security against
false tripping and decide positively whether the fault is within or
outside the protected zone.

7. Operational criteria.
At least two independent criteria of different nature and principle,
both simultaneously present, must be fulfilled in order to achieve
tripping.

8. Flexibility in operation.
Execution of all necessary switching operations (transfer of a
feeder from one bus to another, switching “off” and “on” of the bus
coupler etc) must be possible without restrictions due to the
protection system which shall remain in operation. Protection
should adjust itself automatically to changing exploitation
conditions without the least interruption.

9. Isolator (disconnecting switch) replica.


The busbar differential protection system must be equipped with
isolator repeat relays, energized by isolator contacts. The isolator
repeat relays are used (through their contacts) to a form a replica
of the busbar switching arrangements by switching the current
circuits on the secondary side of the auxiliary current transformer to
the appropriate set of zone buswires and controlling the tripping
circuits.
These isolator repeat relays must be extremely reliable and shall
include a safety mechanism in order to secure correct operation.
Furthermore, failure of the auxiliary D.C. supply shall not affect the
position of these isolator repeat relays once that have been
energized.
Digital busbar protection systems must include all of the above as
one of their functions embedded in their software.

10. Circuit - breaker failure protection.


The busbar differential protection system shall be equipped with
breaker failure protection with adjustable time delay for each bay
(C.B.).
More specifically, if α breaker fails to open when a tripping
command it has been issued, then a signal will be generated which
will be used by PPC accordingly.

ss-055/8a
-4-

11. Additional features of the busbar protection system.

a. The busbar differential protection system must respond and trip


only the breakers of the bus section which is affected by the
fault regardless of whether the bus coupler is opened or closed.
b. The busbar differential protection system shall be capable of
clearing all faults between the current transformer and the
circuit breaker in the bus coupler.

This capability should overcome the blind spot between the current
transformers and the circuit breaker, which arises when the current
transformers are positioned on one side only of the circuit breaker.

12. Facilities of modification and extension.


The protection scheme offered must permit enlargement should the
busbar system be subsequently extended by new bays equipped
with C.T.s having different ratio and characteristics from those
already installed in existing bays.

13. Continuous Monitoring.


Continuous monitoring should be incorporated which permanently
shall monitor the ability of the protection to operate correctly and in
the event of a failure in the protection system, shall give an alarm
and / or disconnect the tripping circuit.
Means shall also be provided in order to indicate failure of D.C.
control voltage.

14. Interference.
The busbar differential protection system shall be immune against
any external interference, coming either from the D.C. supply or
from the measuring circuits or any other cause.

15. Type of circuit.


The busbar differential protection system shall be of the numerical
type

16. Configuration of the busbar differential protection system -


Software
All settings and programming shall be carried out by an embedded
keyboard and display and also by a PC. Any software needed for
the above purpose shall be provided as well.
Software, WINDOWS based, for the parameter setting, analysis of
fault data and records and commissioning shall be provided on the
basis of a royalty free, non exclusive with irrevocable license to use
by PPC.
The software shall be user friendly and displaying on VDU (screen)
all analog waveforms and digital signals. The software shall be
menu-driven.
A number of cables for the communication of the relay with PC
must be included in the offer.

ss-055/8a
-5-

17. Setting ranges

a. Overcurrent release : 0,5 -20xIN in steps of 0,5A


b. Differential current : 0,05xIN
c. Slope K : 20% TO 90% (set at about 65%)

18. Interfacing
The busbar differential protection system shall be fitted with two
serial ports, one for connection to a PC and another for interfacing
with HMI center of a digital computerized substation control system.
The communication protocol should be in accordance with
IEC – 61850 and relevant test certificates of UCA level A or level B
must be submitted.

19. Event and Disturbance recording


The busbar differential protection system must be equipped with
event and disturbance recording capability.

20. Centralized or distributed type


Whether the busbar differential protection system is of the
centralized or distributed type, will be indicated each time in the
inquiry

IX. CABINET CHARACTERISTICS


1. The entire busbar differential protection system shall be, housed in
cabinets of class protection IP52 and of the following approximate
dimensions:
2200mm (height) x 800mm (wide) x 600mm (depth).
The protection system shall be completely wired tested and ready
for connection to the external circuits.

2. Means shall also be provided in order to have the busbar


differential protection system tested during maintenance periods.
Test sockets for the voltage, current and tripping protection circuits
must be included. It should be noted that testing terminal blocks
are not acceptable.

ss-055/8a
-6-

X. STANDARDS
All testing of the busbar differential protection system shall conform to IEC
standards unless, herein, otherwise indicated.

XI. TESTS
A. Type tests.
1. Insulation tests as per IEC 255-5.
a. High voltage test (dielectric) 2kV rms, 50Hz for 1 min.
between all terminals and case earth.
b. High voltage impulse test.
Three (3) positive and three (3) negative impulses of
5kV peak, 1.2 / 50µsec, 0.5J between all terminals
and all terminals and case earth.

2. Disturbance test as per IEC-255 - 2 - 1, class III.


High frequency test (1MHz) as per IEC-22-1, class III or
IEEE / ANSI C37.90.1, 2.5kV peak, 1MHz, 400 shots per
second, duration 2 seconds.

3. Vibration test as per IEC-68-2-6.


Acceleration : 0.5g + 25%
Frequency range : 10Hz - 150Hz
Number of sweep cycles : 20
Sweep rate : 1 octave / mm + 10%
Duration of endurance : 2 hours and 30minutes

B. Routine Tests.
Insulation test (dielectric).
2kV rms, 50Hz for 1 minute between all terminals and case earth.
NOTE : Bidders are required to submit, if available, any official
test reports for all of the above tests along with their
technical offer.

XII. ADDITIONAL DATA TO BE SUPPLIED BY BIDDER


1. Reference list.
A reference list, of the busbar differential protection system offered,
shall be submitted and in which the following data shall be
included:
- Country and customer.
- Network voltage.
- Number of busbars protected (zones).
- Number of feeders.
- Number of bus couplers.
- Number of bus sectionalizing isolators.
- Year of commissioning.

ss-055/8a
-7-

2. Spare parts.
The Manufacturer shall submit a complete list of recommended
spare parts, with unit prices, that - according to his opinion - should
be purchased for a period of five years operation. PPC S.A
maintains the right to purchase or not these spare parts.

3. Drawings - Pamphlets.
Bidders are requested to submit attached to their offers, outline
drawings, over-all dimensions of the complete equipment for
erection purposes as well as any information, sketches and data
necessary for the complete description of the busbar differential
protection system offered by them.

4. In addition all bidders are requested to indicate every deviation


from this hereby specification and the reasons for the deviations.

5. All Bidders are required to answer all items of Attachment ''A''.


Failure to comply or partial filling of the Attachment will constitute
sufficient reason for rejection of the offer.

XIII. ADDITIONAL DATA TO BE SUPPLIED BY BIDDER


1. Drawings.
The successful bidder, after the signing of the contract, is obligated
to submit three (3) sets of drawings (schematic, wiring and
physical) for approval prior to the shipment of the busbar
differential protection system.

2. Maintenance Instructions.
Maintenance Instructions for the busbar differential protection
system.

3. Instructions for configuration and commissioning.


Instructions for configuration and commissioning of the busbar
differential protection system.

Rev.6 /ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/sept. 24,2004


Rev.7 /ΙΙδ/pm/AG/June 2006
Rev.8 /ΙΙδ/pt/IA/January 2008
Rev.8 /ΙΙδ/pt/IA/December 2008

ss-055/8a
-8-

“ATTACHMENT A”

NUMERICAL
BUSBAR DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION SYSTEM
1. Type :………...…………………………

2. Manufacturer :………...…………………………

3. System operation voltage and


number of bays :………...…………………………

4. Is the busbar differential protection


system equipped with auxiliary current
transformers? :………...…………………………

5. Tripping time (from occurrence of fault


to energizing of circuit breaker trip coil) :………...…………………………

6. Is the busbar differential protection system


extremely stable against external faults even
in case of saturated CTs? :………...…………………………

7. Is the sensitivity for internal faults, adjustable


and unaffected by the number of feeders? :………...…………………………

8. Measuring principle (low-impedance) ? :………...…………………………

9. Is security operation provided against


false tripping? :………...…………………………

10. Operational criteria to be fulfilled in order


to achieve tripping :………...…………………………

11. Does the protection adjust itself


automatically to all switching operation
conditions without the least interruption? :………...…………………………

12. Is the protection system equipped with


isolator repeat relays, energized by isolator
contacts, to a form a replica of the busbar
switching arrangements (VIII-9) :………...…………………………

13. Is the busbar differential protection system


equipped with breaker failure protection with
adjustable time delay? :………...…………………………

14. Does the busbar differential protection


system respond and trip only the breakers of
the bus section which is affected by the fault? :………...………………………

ss-055/8a
-9-

15. Is the busbar differential protection


system capable of overcoming the
blind spot between current
transformers and bus coupler? :………...…………………………

16. Does the protection scheme permit enlargement? :………...………………….

17. Is there continuous monitoring incorporated


that gives an alarm even in the case of D.C.
control voltage failure? :………...…………………………

18. Is the protection system immune against


any external interference? :………...…………………………

19. Can all the settings and programming be


carried out by an embedded keyboard and
display as well as by a PC? :………...…………………………
-Is the software WINDOWS based, user
friendly and menu driven? :………………...…………………
-Can all analog waveforms and digital
signals be displayed on VDU? :………………...…………………
-Is the relevant software provided? :………………...…………………

20. Setting ranges


a. Overcurrent release :………...…………………………
b. Differential current :………...…………………………
c. Slope K (%) :………...…………………………

21. Are there two serial ports (one for connection


to a PC and another for interfacing with HMI)? :………...………………………

22. Does the offer include cables for


communication of the relay with PC? :………...…………………………

23. Communication protocols of the system :………...…………………………

24. Is the busbar differential protection system


equipped with event and disturbance
recording capability? :………...…………………………

25. Is the busbar differential protection system of


the centralized or distributed type? :………...…………………………

26. Cabinets of the protection system housing:


- Number :………...…………………………
- Dimensions :………...…………………………
- Protection class (IP) :………...…………………………

27. Are the means provided in order


to have the system tested during
maintenance periods? :………...…………………………

ss-055/8a
-10-

28. Are test sockets for the voltage, current


and tripping protection circuits included? :………...…………………………

29. Is the offered system completely wired


tested and ready for connection to the
external circuits? :………...…………………………

30. Deviations if any from the present


specification and the reasons thereof :………...…………………………
………...…………………………
………...…………………………

ss-055/8a
PUBLIC POWER CORPORAΤIΟΝ S.A.
TRANSMISSION NEW PROJECTS DEPT.

July 2008

SPECIFICATION SS - 68/3

DIGITΑL DIFFERENTIAL RELAY FOR AUTOTRANSFORMER PROTECTION.

Ι. SCOPE

This hereby specification covers the requirements concerning the technical and operational
characteristics and also testing requirements for digital differential relays used for the protection of
3-phase, 280ΜVΑ autotransformers with delta tertiary and of voltage ratio of 400/150/30KV and of
wye - wye - delta connection.

II. ΚΕΥ WORDS

Digital autotransformer differential relays, digital differential relays for three - winding transformers.

III. USE

The digital differential relays are to be used for the protection of 3 - phase 280MVA, 400/150/30KV
autotransformers of wye - wye - delta (tertiary) connection.

IV. STANDARDS

The relays shall conform to the latest IEC standards. Relays based on ANSI / ΙΕΕΕ or DIN / VDE
standards can be offered, subject however, to the Purchaser's approval.

V. OPERATlNG CONDITIONS

1. Installation : Indoors
2. Temperature range : -5°C to 55° C
3. Relative Humidity : 5% to 85%

1
VI. CHARACTERISTICS OF ΤΗΕ ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1. Rated Voltage (phase to phase) : 400 KV rms


150 KV rms
30 KV rms

2. Maximum Operating Voltage : 420 KV rms


170 KV rms
36 KV rms

3. Rated frequency : 50 Ηz

4. System Neutral : Solidly Earthed

5. Operating frequency range : 50 Ηz ± 0.2 Ηz

6. Rated short circuit leνel : 40 ΚΑ at 420 KV


25 ΚΑ at 150 KV
20 ΚΑ at 36 KV

7. Maximum permissible duration of fault in order to


maintain stability : ≤ 500msec.

VII. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS

The digital differential relays will be used in conjunction with current transformers which have the
following characteristics.

- 400 KV side : Ratio = 400/ 1Α, Burden = 60VA, Accuracy class = 5Ρ20

- 150 KV side : Ratio = 1000/ 1Α, Burden = 30VA, Accuracy class = 5Ρ20

- 30 KV side : Ratio = 2000/1Α, Burden = 60VA, Accuracy class = 5Ρ20

VIII. DIGITAL DIFFERENTIAL RELAY REQUIRED PROTECTION


CHARACTERISTICS

1. Protection capability : a. Against all three and two


phase internal faults.
b. Against all interterm faults
c. Against all phase to
ground internal faults.

2
2. Operating Characteristic : Dual slope percentage operating
characteristic which shall prevent operation
unless the differential current is greater than a
certain percentage of the through fault
current.
This percentage shall be adjustable either
continuously or by steps.

3. Vector Current transformer ratio adapta-


tion (correction). : There shall be no need for external
interposing CTs.

4. Blocking characteristics : a. Second harmonic blocking or restrain plus


dc blocking for autotransformer inrush
current.
b. Filth harmonic blocking against
autotransformer overexcitation current.

5. Additional Blocking characteristics : Restrain against external faults with current


autotransformer saturation

6. Protection against out - of - balance


current : The out- of- balance current produced by the
autotransformer tap – changing or current
transformer mismatch shall be compensated
by means of the percentage bias feature.

7. Earth fault protection : Α restricted earth fault protection shall be


available

IX. DIGITΑL DIFFERENTIAL RELAY REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

1. Type of differential relay : Digital (Numerical).

2. Input rated current : 1Α.

3. Auxiliary voltage supply : 220 V DC

4. Auxiliary voltage supply tolerance : +10% -15%

5. Output Contacts

a. Trip contacts
- Number : at least two (2)

3
- Continuous current rating : 5 Α.
- Switching making capacity : 1000 W.
- Switching breaking capacity : 30W.
- Current rating for 0.5 sec : 30A.

b. Alarm contacts :
- Number of alarm contacts : at least four (4)
selectable contacts, plus two ΝΟ
contacts all free of voltage.

- Contact continuous current rating : 1A.

6. Construction : The relay shall be of the


draw - out type for panel
surface mounting.

7. Relay Housing (case) : The housing shall provide a


degree of protection of IΡ51 as
per IEC.

8. Self – diagnostics : The relay shall be equipped


with self -diagnostics capacity,
thus facilitating repairs.

9. Short circuiting of contacts


of the current input unit (if any) : Automatic short – circuit of all
current contacts shall be
foreseen, if the input unit is
of the draw -out type .

10. Construction design : The construction preferably will


be of the modular design
with plug- units.

11. Configuration of the relay : All settings (parameterization)


shall be input by means of an
integrated keyboard and a
display and by a PC. The
settings shall be stored in a non
- volatile memory, so that they
will not be lost even during
interruption of the substation
auxiliary voltage and relay's
internal battery (if any).

4
X. DIGITΑL DIFFERENTIAL RELAY REQUIRED ADDITIONAL FEATURES

1. Fault Recording : All faults shall be recorded and stored for


analysis. The capacity of memory shall permit
the storage of at least four (4) faults. Capability
shall exist so that the fault data can be read
remotely via modem.
The recording shall include both analog and
digital signals.

2. Measurements (metering) : The measurement function shall be capable of


measuring in real time all phase currents and
capability shall exist so that this data can be
read either locally or remotely via modem.
3. Synchronization : Besides an internal synchronization clock,
the relay shall be capable of being
synchronized via a substation automation
control system's master clock which has
capability of GPS synchronization besides of its
own.

4. External Wiring of the relay : The relay shall be equipped with screw type
terminals suitable for 2.5 mm2 conductors.

5. Special Accessories : Any special accessories needed for testing


and communication purposes
must be provided.(such as
special cables, plugs, interfaces, adaptors etc)

ΧI. COMMUNICATIONS

The relay shall be fitted with two (2) serial ports for reasons of interfacing and specifically with :

1. One serial port suitable for connection to a PC.


Αn operator program shall be available to enable user - friendly parameter setting, analysis of
fault data and records and commissioning either locally or remotely via modem.

2. One serial port suitable for system interface (fiber optic) shall be available for connection to a
digital computerized substation control and protection system. The communication protocol
shall be as per IEC-61850 or IEC 60870 - 5-103, or Profibus-fms, or Modbus/RTU or DNP 3.0

3. One serial port suitable for connection to a digital computerized substation control and
protection system via the same protocol used by the substation control and protection system.

5
XII. SOFTWARE

Software, preferably WINOOWS based, for the parameter setting analysis of fault data and records
and commissioning shall be provided on a basis of a royalty free, non exclusive with irrevocable
License to use by PPC S.A.
The software shall be user friendly and capable of displaying on VDU (screen) all analog wave
forms and digital signals. The software shall be menu - driven.

XIII. TESTS

1. Routine Tests as per IEC 60255 - 5


a. Dielectric Withstand test : 2 KV rms, 50 ΗΖ, 1 minute,
between all terminals and case earth.

b. Impulse Voltage test : 5 KV peak, 1.2/50µs, 0.5j

2. Type tests.
a. Impulse Voltage test as
Per IEC-60255 - 5. : 5 KV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5j

b. High Frequency test as


per IEC -60255-22-1. : 2.5 ΚV peak, 1ΜΗz, t = 15 µs,
400 shots/sec, duration = 2 sec.

c. Electrostatic Discharge test


as per IEC-60255-22-2 class III : 4KV contact discharge,
8 KV air discharge both polarities.

d. Fast Transient test as per


IEC-60255-22-4 class III : 2 KV, 5 ΚΗz, burst length =15ms,
repetition rate=300ms, both polarities,
duration = 1 min.

e. Vibration test as per IEC- 60068-2


and IEC 60255 - 21-1 : 10 Ηz to 60Ηz, 0.035mm amplitude.
60 to 500Ηz, 0.5g acceleration.

ΝΟΤΕ: Ιn case of lack of IEC testing standards, the only other standards that could be considered are
VDE and ANSI/IEEE, subject, however to the purchaser's approval.

6
XIV. INFORMATION WHICH MUST BE PROVIDED BV ΑLL BIDDERS

1. All necessary technical pamphlets and technical information so that the technical evaluation of
the offered differential relay can be carried out.

2. Outline drawings with over-all dimensions and wiring diagrams of the offered differential relays.

3. Any test certificates for all specified type tests in this hereby specification may be submitted along
with the technical offer.
Acceptance or not of the submitted test certificates will be subject to the purchaser's approval.

4. Α reference list shall be submitted and in which the following shall be included :
- Country and buyer
- Type of the relay
- Number of units sold
- Year of sale.

5. All bidders are required to complete attachment 'Ά". Failure to comply with this request or
submission of attachment 'Ά" incomplete shall constitute sufficient reason for rejection of the
offer.

XV. DATA WHICH MUST BE PROVIDED BY THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER

1. Complete functional and wiring drawings for approval before shipment of the relays.

2. Complete outline dimensional drawings for approval before shipment of the relays.

3. All necessary documentation concerning installation, commissioning, operation, maintenance,


parameter setting and trouble shooting of the relay.

4. Complete instructions for the operation and application of the related software.

XVI. PACKING

Each relay with all of its units (if any) shall be packaged separately inside a robust box properly
labelled.

7
ATTACHMENT "Α"

1. Type of the offered relay : ………………………

2. Operating temperature range of the relay : ………………………

3. Analog Inputs of the relay


a. Rated Current : ………………………
b. Rated Burden : ………………………

4. Digital Inputs
a. Rated Voltage : ………………………
b. Rated Voltage tolerance : ………………………

5. Trip contacts
a. Number of trip contacts : ………………………
b. Continuous current rating : ………………………
c. Switching making capacity : ………………………
d. Switching breaking capacity : ………………………
e. Current rating for 0.5 sec : ………………………
f. Rated Voltage : ………………………220V DC

6. Alarm contacts
a. Number of alarm contacts : ………………………
b. Are they selectable? : ………………………
c. Rated Voltage : ………………………220V DC

7. Auxiliary Voltage supply of the relay : ………………………

8. Auxiliary Voltage supply tolerance of the relay : ………………………

9. Is the offered relay of the draw-out


type and suitable for surface panel mounting? : ………………………

10. Describe the operating characteristic of the relay : ………………………


: ………………………
: ………………………
: ………………………
11. Is the relay equipped with current transformer
ratio adaptation (correction)? : ………………………
: ………………………
: ………………………
12. Are second and fifth harmonics and autotrans-
former inrush currents blocked? : ………………………

: ………………………

8
: ………………………
13. Is restrain provided against external faults with
current transformer saturation? : ………………………
: ………………………
: ………………………

14. Is the out- of- balance current due to tap-changing


or current mismatch compensated? : ………………………

15. Is restricted earth fault protection provided? : ………………………


: ………………………
: ………………………

16. Is automatic short-circuiting of the current contacts


available in the case where the current input unit (if any)
is of the draw out type? : ………………………

17. Degree of protection of the relay case : ………………………

18. Is the relay equipped with screw type terminals


suitable for 2.5mm2 conductors? : ………………………

19. Is the relay equipped with an integral keyboard


and display for parameter setting? : ………………………

20. Can the relay be set by PC? : ………………………

21. Is the offered relay equipped with self-diagnostics? : ………………………

22. Is the offered relay equipped with fault recording? : ………………………

23. Is the offered relay equipped with measurements


capability? : ………………………

24. Describe in brief the measurement feature capabilities : ………………………


: ………………………
: ………………………

25. Can the offered relay be synchronized via a substation


automation control system's master clock? : ………………………
: ………………………

26. Is the offered relay equipped with two serial ports?


One for connection to a PC, the other for connection
to the digital computerized substation control system? : ………………………

27. What is the communication protocol used for the


connection of the relay to the digital computerized : ………………………

9
substation control system? : ………………………
: ………………………

28. Is software provided? : ………………………

29. Type of software provided : ………………………


: ………………………
: ………………………

30. Is the offered relay of the modular type? : ………………………


: ………………………

Α. G./me/20.3.2002
A.G./mm/4.7.2003
PK/pm/16.7.2008

10
PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION S.A January 2006
ATHENS - GREECE

SPECIFICATION No. SS-94/5


SINGLE PHASE LARGE RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT DETECTION
NUMERICAL RELAY
AND OF A SUITABLE CURRENT TRANSFORMER

I. SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements with regard the technical characteristics,
design characteristics and testing of a single phase earth fault numerical relay for the
detection of high impedance earth faults and of a suitable current transformer which
shall be used in connection with the above relay.

II. KEYWORDS
Numerical single-phase relay for the detection of earth fault, earth
fault relay, overcurrent relay, current transformers, instrument transformers.

III. USE
The relay will be used for the detection of small earth fault currents, which by
design are not being detected by the overcurrent protection relays of the MV
distribution lines. The indoor type CT shall be connected to the earthing terminal of the
neutral earthing resistor of the power transformer.

IV. STANDARDS

The numerical relays shall be in accordance with the following IEC standards:
-IEC – 60255-5
-IEC – 60255-22
-IEC – 61000-4

The current transformers shall be in accordance with IEC-60044-1 standard.

V. METHOD OF SUBMITTING THE OFFER

Prospective bidders are required to subunit separate technical and economic offers for
the two equipment of this hereby speciations. Furthermore they can submit offers only
for one of the two equipment or both, but separately, if the desire so.

VI. OPERATING CONDITIONS


For the relay

1. Installation : Inside the control building of the


substation
2. Temperature range : -5°C to 50°C
3. Relative humidity : 5% to 85%

IIδ/Revision No.4/sp/AG/january 2006 1 ss-94-5a


4. Altitude : Up to 1000m above
sea level

For the current transformer

1. Installation : Inside the metallic kiosk of the


earthing resistor of IP 34 protection as
per IEC-60529
2. Temperature range : -25°C to 45°C
3. Relative humidity : 5% to 85%

4. Altitude : Up to 1000m above


sea level

VII. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF 20 KV SYSTEM

1. Rated Voltage (phase to phase) : 20 KV


2. Maximum Operating Voltage : 24 KV
3. Number of phases :3
4. Rated frequency : 50 Hz
5. Short circuit level : 10 KA
6. Basic Impulse Insulation Level (Lightning
impulse level) : 150 KV for outdoor equipment
and 125 kV for indoor
7. Rated DC supply voltage : 110 V DC
8. Method of earthing : the 20KV system is earthed via
a 12 resistor

VIII. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RELAY

1. Type : Numerical overcurrent relay of definite


time suitable for the detection of small
earth fault currents
2. Rated input current : 5A
3. Number of stages : Two (2), IE> and IE>>
4. Auxiliary supply voltage : 110 V DC
5. Setting range for both stages
(IE>) and (IE>>) : (0.01 to 6) x IN in steps of 0.05A
6. Delay time for both stages : 0 to 150 seconds in steps of 0.1 sec
7. Thermal withstand capability of the
relay in AC current input : 100 xIN for 1 sec
40 xIN for 2 sec
4 xIN continuous
8. Use of the stages : One stage (IE>) shall be used for
signalling when an earth current of 1A
to 1,5A is detected to flow through the

IIδ/Revision No.4/sp/AG/january 2006 2 ss-94-5a


neutral of the transformer. The second
stage (IE>>) shall be used selectively to
provide a tripping command to the
20 KV transformer central circuit
breaker when an earth current of ≥10 A
is detected to flow through the neutral
of the transformer

9. Number of output contacts : Two (2) contacts related with


stage IE>. Both contacts shall be of the
signalling type with rated current =1A
and
Two (2) output contacts related with
stage IE>>. One of which shall be of the
signalling type with rated current =1A,
and the other of the command type with
rated current = 5A, and with making
capability of 30 A for 0.5 sec and
breaking capability of 0.25A at 110
V DC

IX. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED CHARACTERISTICS OF THE NUMERAL


RELAY

1. The relay shall be of reduced sensitivity with regard to 3rd harmonics currents.

2. The relay shall be equipped with an RS232 port for PC communication.

3. The relay shall be equipped with an RS485 port for communication purposes via
IEC-61850 protocol or IEC – 60870 –5-103 or Profibus-fms or Moddbus/Rtu or
DNP 3.0.

4. The relay terminals shall be of the screw type and must be suitable to be wired with
control cable of cross section of 2.5mm ².

5. The relay shall be suitable for panel flush mounting.


6. The degree of protection of the relay housing shall be IP52 as per IEC-60529.

X. REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CURRENT


TRANSFORMER

1. Rated Voltage : 12 KV
2. Rated Frequency : 50 Hz
3. Ratio : 25/5-5A
4. Primary rated current : 25 A
5. Number of secondary windings : Two (2). One for protection purposes and
one for metering
6. Protection winding characteristics

IIδ/Revision No.4/sp/AG/january 2006 3 ss-94-5a


a. Rated current :5A
b. Rated output power : 30 VA
c. Accuracy Class : 5P
d. Accuracy Limit factor : 10
7. Metering winding characteristics
a. Rated current :5A
b. Rated output power : 30 VA
c. Accuracy Class :1
d. Instrument security factor : FS2
8. Power Frequency Voltage withstand
of the primary winding : 28 KV
9. Lightning impulse voltage withstand
(1.2/50µs) : 75 KV
10. Power Frequency voltage withstand
of the secondary winding : 3 KV
11. Rated continuous thermal current : 1.2x25A=30A
12. Rated short-time thermal current (Ith) : 1250A
13. Rated dynamic current (Idyn) : 3125A
14. Limit of temperature rise of the
winding when carrying the rated
continuous thermal current : 75oC , insulation class E
15. Type of material of the insulating
housing : Cycloaliphatic epoxy resin
16. Partial discharge level : 20pC at 14.4KV
17. Type : Indoor, dry type
18. Installation : Inside the metallic kiosk
of the power transformer’s
neutral earthing (grounding) resistor

XI. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CURRENT


TRANSFORMER

1. The primary terminals of the CT must be suitable to be connected with a tin-plated


copper strip of dimensions at 40x4mm (width x thickness) with the aid of proper
bolts and nuts.

2. The secondary windings terminals of the CT must be suitable for connection with
control cables with cross section of 4mm2

3. The CT must be suitable to be mounted on a metallic surface or on a metallic


pedestal through bolts and for this reason it must bear at its base four (4) hot-dip
galvanized steel strips with proper wholes so that the CT can be supported through
bolts and nuts. The necessary bolts and nuts must be part of the supply.

4. The dimentions of the CT can not exceed:


35cm in diameter 25cm in height and 20cm in depth.

IIδ/Revision No.4/sp/AG/january 2006 4 ss-94-5a


XII. TESTS

A. Testes for the numerical relay

1. Routine Tests
a. Power frequency voltage withstand test : 2KV,
50Hz for one (1) minute in accordance
with IEC-60255-5 standard

2. Type Tests
a. Impulse voltage withstand: 5KV peak value
In accordance with IEC – 600255-5 standard

b. High frequency disturbance test: 2,5KV,


1MHz, t=15µs, 400 pulses/sec, 2 seconds
in duration in accordance with IEC- 60255-22-1,
class III standard

c. Fast transient disturbance test: 2KV, 5/50ns, 5 MHz


in accordance with IEC-60255-22-4, class III standard

4. Electrostatic discharge test : 4KV/6KV contact discharge, 8KV


air discharge with both polarities 150pF,
Ri=330Ω in accordance with ΙΕC-
60255-22-2 class III and IEC-61000-4-2,
class III standards

B. Tests for the current transformer in accordance with IEC-60044-1 standard

1. Routine Tests
a. Verification of terminal markings
b. Power-frequency withstand test on primary
winding: 28KV, 50Hz, 1 minute
c. Power-frequency withstand test on the secondary
winding: 3KV, 50Hz, 1 minute
d. Partial discharge measurement (≤20pC at 14.4KV)
e. Determination of errors

2. Type Tests
a. Temperature rise test
b. Lightning impulse test for the primary
winding: 75KV peak value of shape 1.2/50µs
c. Short-time current test
d. Power frequency voltage wet
test: 28KV, 50Hz for 1 minute

IIδ/Revision No.4/sp/AG/january 2006 5 ss-94-5a


XIII. PACKING

The relays and the CT’s shall be delivered packaged separately inside a robust paper
box suitable for this type of equipment.

XIV. INFORMATION WHICH MUST BE PROVIDED BY ALL BIDDERS

1. All bidders must provide all information which required in ATTACHMENT


‘Α’ of this hereby specification. Failure to comply with this requirement will
result in rejection of the offer.
2. Dimensional and outline drawings for the relay and the current transformer.
3. Preliminary drawing depicting cross section and top view of the current
transformer and also depicting how the CT is to be mounted. Failure to comply
with this request will result in rejection of the offer.
4. Technical prospectus and any other information for the relay and the current
transformer
5. Schematic and wiring drawing for the relay.

XV. INFORMATION WHICH MUST BE PROVIDED BY THE SUCCESSFUL


BIDDER

1. Final drawings indicating dimensions, cross view and top view and
supporting strips of the CT.

2. Setting instructions, maintenance instructions for the relay and any software
needed for its setting and parameterization.

IIδ/Revision No.4/sp/AG/january 2006 6 ss-94-5a


ATTACHMENT ‘Α’
SINGLE-PHASE LARGE RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT
NUMERICAL RELAY
AND SUITABLE CURRENT TRANSFORMER

Failure to answer all following questions will result in rejection of the offer.

A. RELAY

1. Manufacturer of the relay : ..................................


..................................
..................................

2. Type of the relay : ..................................


..................................
..................................

3. Temperature range during operation of the relay : ..................................

4. Temperature range during storage of the realy : ..................................

5. Rated frequency : ..................................

6. Rated input current : ..................................

7. Is the relay of the numerical type? : ..................................

8. Is the relay of the definite time? : ..................................

9. Number of overcurrent stages : ..................................

10. Auxiliary supply voltage : ..................................

11. Setting range of the first overcurrent stage (IE>) : ..................................


• step ..................................
12. Setting range of the second overcurrent stage (IE>>) : ..................................
• step ..................................

13. Time delay for both overcurrent stage : ..................................


• step ..................................

14. Thermal withstand capability of the relay


• Continuous : ..................................
• For two (2) second : ..................................
• For one (1) second : ..................................

IIδ/Revision No.4/sp/AG/january 2006 7 ss-94-5a


15. Can the one overcurrent stage (IE>) be used for the defection of
currents of 1 to 1.5A and to provide an output signal, and the other
stage ( IE>>) to provide a tripping command when it detects a current : ..................................
of ≥10A? ..................................
..................................

16. Output contacts related to stage (IE>)


a. Number of signalling contacts : ..................................
b. Rated current of signalling contacts : ..................................
c. Making current of the signalling contacts : ..................................
d. Braking current of the signalling contacts : ..................................

17. Output contacts related to (IE>>) stage


a. Number of signalling contacts : ..................................
b. Number of command (tripping) contacts : ..................................
c. Rated current of signalling contacts : ..................................
d. Rated current of command contacts : ..................................
e. Rated making current of command contact for 0.5sec : ..................................
f. Breaking current of the command contact at 110V DC : ..................................

18. Is the relay of reduced sensitivity to 3rd harmonics currents? : ..................................

19. Is the relay equipped with an RS485 port for communication


purposes via IEC 61850 protocol? Or IEC 60780-5-103 or Profibus-
fms or Moddbus/Rtu or DNP 3.0? : ..................................
..................................
…..............................

20. Is the relay equipped with an RS232 port for interfacing with a
PC? : …..............................

21. Are the relay terminals of the screw type and suitable to be wired
with control cables of 2.5mm² in cross section? : …..............................
…..............................
…..............................

22. Is the relay suitable for panel flush mounting? : ……...........................

23. Degree of protection of the housing of the relay : …..............................

24. Weight of the relay : …..............................

25. Power consumption of the relay in VA : …..............................

IIδ/Revision No.4/sp/AG/january 2006 8 ss-94-5a


B. CURRENT TRANSFORMER

1. Manufacturer : ..................................
..................................

2. Type : ..................................
..................................
..................................

3. Rated Voltage : ..................................

4. Rated frequency : ..................................

5. Ratio : ..................................

6. Primary rated current : ..................................

7. Number of secondary windings : ..................................

8. Protection winding characteristics : ..................................

a. Rated current : ..................................

b. Rated output of the secondary : ..................................

c. Accuracy class : ..................................

d. Accuracy limit factor : ..................................

9. Metering winding characteristics : ..................................

a. Rated current : ..................................

b. Rated power output : ..................................

c. Accuracy class : ..................................

d. Instument security factor : ..................................

10. Rated continuous thermal current : ..................................

11. Rated short-time thermal current (Ith) : ..................................

12. Rated dynamic current (Idyn) : ..................................

13. Power frequency voltage withstand of the primary winding : ..................................

14. Power frequency voltage withstand of the secondary winding : ..................................

15. Lightning impulse voltage withstand : ..................................

IIδ/Revision No.4/sp/AG/january 2006 9 ss-94-5a


16. Temperature rise limit : ..................................

17. Type of material of the insulating housing : ..................................


..................................
..................................

18. Partial discharge level : ..................................

19. Are the primary terminals suitable to be connected to a tin-plated


copper strip of 40x40mm in dimensions? : ..................................

20. Are the secondary terminals suitable to be connected to control


cable of 4mm² in cross section? : ..................................

21. Does the CT bear at its base four (4) hot-dip galvanized steel
strips for supporting purposes? : ..................................
..................................
22. Are the necessary bolts, nuts, and washers for the support
(mounting) of the CT part of the supply? : ..................................

23. Weight of the CT : ..................................

24. Dimensions of the CT : ..................................


..................................
..................................

25. Insulation class as per IEC 60085 : ..................................

IIδ/Revision No.4/sp/AG/january 2006 10 ss-94-5a


PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION S.A.
SUBSTATION SPECIFICATION AND EQUIPMENT SECTION

June 2006

SPECIFICATION SS – 100/4
DIGITAL DIFFERENTIAL RELAY FOR
TRANSFORMER PROTECTION.

I. SCOPE

Τhis hereby specification covers the requirements concerning the technical and
operational characteristics and also testing requirements for digital differential relays used
for the protection of 3-phase, power transformers of 40/50 MVA, 150/15.75 – 21 KV and
of delta - wye connection.

II. KEY WORDS

Digital transformer differential relays, digital differential relays for two – winding
transformers.

III. USE

The digital differential relays are to be used for the protection of 3 – phase 40/50 MVA,
150/15.75 – 21 KV transformers of delta – wye connection. The zone of protection shall
include and the 20KV bus of the substation (Transformer +20Kv-bus differential
protection).

IV. STANDARDS

The relays shall conform to the latest IEC standards. Relays based on ANSI / ΙEEE or
DIN / VDE standards can be offered, subject however, to the Purchaser’s approval.

V. OPERATING CONDITIONS

1. Installation : Indoors
2. Temperature range : -5oC to 55o C
3. Relative Humidity : 5% to 85%
2

VI. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1. Rated Voltage (phase to phase) : : 150 KV rms

2. Maximum Operating Voltage : 170 KV rms

3. Rated frequency : 50 Hz

4. System Neutral : Solidly Earthed

5. Operating frequency range : 50 Hz ± 0.2 Hz

6. Rated short circuit level : 25 KA at 150 KV

7. Maximum permissible duration of fault in order to


maintain stability : ≤ 500m sec.

VII. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS

The digital differential relays will be used in conjunction with current transformers which
have the following characteristics.

- 150 KV side : Ratio = 200/ 1A, Burden = 25VA, Accuracy class = 5P20

- 15.75 - 20 KV side : Ratio = 950–720 / 0.58Α, Burden = 30VA, Accuracy class = 5P20
for a substation with the 20KV side installed outdoors.

- 20KV side: Ratio = 600/0.5A, Burden = 15VA and Accuracy class = 5P10 for a
substation with the 20KV side installed inside the control building of the substation.

VIII. DIGITAL DIFFERENTIAL RELAY REQUIRED PROTECTION CHARACTERISTICS

1. Protection capability :a. Against all three and two phase internal faults.
b. Against all interturn faults
c. Against all phase to ground internal faults.

2. Operating Characteristic : Dual slope percentage operating characteristic


which shall prevent operation unless the
differential current is greater than a certain
percentage of the through fault current.
This percentage shall be adjustable either
continuously or by steps.
3

3. Current transformer vector


and ratio adaptation (correction) : There shall be no need for external
interposing CTs.
In other words, the relay must be equipped
with capability of adjusting CT ratio and angle
(phase) in its input.

4. Blocking characteristics: a. Second harmonic blocking or restrain plus


dc blocking for transformer inrush current.
b. Fifth harmonic blocking against transformer
overexcitation current.
c. Zero –sequence current filtering so that out
of-zone earth faults are not seen by the
transformer protection as an in-zone fault.

5. Additional Blocking characteristics : Restrain against external faults with current


transformer saturation.

6. Protection against out – of –


balance current : The out- of- balance current produced by the
transformer tap – changing or current
transformer mismatch shall be compensated
by means of the percentage bias feature.

7. Earth fault protection : Α restricted earth fault protection shall be


available

IX. DIGITAL DIFFERENTIAL RELAY REQUIRED TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

1. Type of differential relay : Digital (Numerical).

2. Input rated current : 1Α.

3. Auxiliary voltage supply : 110 V D C

4. Auxiliary voltage supply tolerance : + 10%


- 15%
5. Output Contacts

a. Trip contacts
- Number : at least two (2)
- Continuous current rating : 5 A.
- Switching making capacity : 1000 W at 110V DC
- Switching breaking capacity : 30 W at 110V DC
- Current rating for 0.5 sec : 30 Α.
4

b. Alarm contacts
- Number of alarm contacts : at least two (2) selectable contacts, plus
two NO contacts all free of voltage.

- Contact continuous current rating : 1 A.

6. Construction : The relay shall be of the draw – out type


for panel surface mounting.

7. Relay Housing (case) : The housing shall provide a degree of


protection of IP51 as per IEC.

8. Self – diagnostics : Τhe relay shall be equipped with self -


diagnostics capacity, thus facilitating
repairs.

9. Short circuiting of contacts


of the current input unit (if any) : Automatic short – circuit of all current
contacts shall be foreseen, if the input
unit is of the draw – out type.

10. Construction design : Τhe construction preferably will be of


the modular design with plug – units.

11. Configuration of the relay : All settings (parameterization) shall be


input by means of an integrated
keyboard and a display and by a PC.
The settings shall be stored in a non –
volatile – memory, so that they will not
be lost even during interruption of the
substation auxiliary voltage and relay’s
internal battery (if any).

X. DIGITAL DIFFERENTIAL RELAY REQUIRED ADDITIONAL FEATURES

1. Fault Recording : All faults shall be recorded and stored


for analysis. The capacity of memory
shall permit the storage of at least
four (4) faults. Capability shall exist so
that the fault data can be read remotely
via modem. The recording shall include
both analog and digital signals.
5

2. Measurements (metering) : The measurement function shall be


capable of measuring in real time all
phase currents and capability shall
exist so that this data can be read
either locally or remotely via modem.

3. Synchronization : Besides an internal synchronization


clock, the relay shall be capable of
being synchronized via a substation
automation control system’s master
clock which has capability of GPS
synchronization besides of its own.

4. External wiring of the relay : The relay shall be equipped with screw
type terminals suitable for 2.5 mm2
conductors.

5. Special Accessories : Any special accessories needed for


testing and communication purposes
must be provided (such as special
cables, plugs, interfaces, adaptors etc).

XI. COMMUNICATIONS

The relay shall be fitted with two (2) serial ports for reasons of interfacing
and specifically with :

1. One serial port suitable for connection to a PC.


An operator program shall be available to enable user – friendly parameter setting,
analysis of fault data and records and commissioning either locally or remotely via
modem.

2. One serial port suitable for system interface (fiber optic) shall be available for
connection to a digital computerized substation control system. The communication
protocol shall be as per IEC 60870 – 5 – 103 or Profibus, or Lon or Modbus RTU or
DNP3.0 or IEC – 61850.

XII. SOFTWARE

Software, preferably WINDOWS based, for the parameter setting analysis of fault
data and records and commissioning shall be provided on a basis of a royalty free,
non exclusive with irrevocable license to use by PPC S.A.
The software shall be user friendly and capable of displaying on VDU (screen) all
analog wave forms and digital signals. The software shall be menu – driven.
6

XIII. TESTS

1. Routine Tests as per IEC 602555 – 5


a. Dielectric Withstand test : 2 ΚV rms, 50 Hz, 1 minute,
between all terminals and case
earth.

b. Impulse Voltage test : 5 KV peak, 1.2/50µs, 0.5j

2. Type tests.
a. Impulse Voltage test as per IEC - 60255 - 5. : 5 KV peak, 1.2/ 50 µs, 0.5j

b. High Frequency test as per IEC –60255-22-1. : 2.5 KV peak, 1MHz, t = 15 µs,
400 shoots/sec, duration = 2 sec.

c. Electrostatic Discharge test as per


IEC-60255-22-2 class III : 4KV contact discharge,8 KV
air discharge both polarities.

d. Fast Transient test as per


IEC-60255-22-4 class III : 2 KV, 5 KHz, brust length =15ms,
repetition rate = 300ms, both
polarities, duration = 1min.

e. Vibration test as per IEC- 60068-2


and IEC 60255 – 21 – 1 : 10 Hz to 60Hz, 0.035mm
amplitude.
60 to 500Hz, 0.5g acceleration.

NOTE: In case of lack of IEC testing standards, the only other standards that could be
considered are VDE and ANSI/IEEE, subject, however to the purchaser’s approval.

XIV. INFORMATION WHICH MUST BE PROVIDED BY ALL BIDDERS

1. All necessary technical pamphlets and technical information so that the technical
evaluation of the offered differential relay can be carried out.

2. Outline drawings with over-all dimensions and wiring diagrams of the offered
differential relays.

3. Any test certificates for all specified type tests in this hereby specification may be
submitted along with the technical offer.
Acceptance or not of the submitted test certificates will be subject to the purchaser’s
approval.
7

4. A reference list shall be submitted and in which the following shall be included :
- Country and buyer
- Type of the relay
- Number of units sold
- Year of sale.

5. All bidders are required to complete attachment ‘’A’’. Failure to comply with this
request or submission of attachment ‘’A’’ incomplete shall constitute sufficient reason
for rejection of the offer.

XV. DATA WHICH MUST BE PROVIDED BY THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER

1. Complete functional and wiring drawings for approval before shipment of the relays.

2. Complete outline dimensional drawings for approval before shipment of the relays.

3. All necessary documentation concerning installation, commissioning, operation,


maintenance, parameter setting and trouble shooting of the relay.

4. Complete instructions for the operation and application of the related software.

XVI. PACKING

Each relay with all of its units (if any) shall be packaged separately inside a robust box
properly labeled.
8

ATTACHMENT “A”

1. Type of the offered relay : ..................................................

2. Operating temperature range of the relay : ..................................................

3. Analog Inputs of the relay


a. Rated Current : ..................................................
b. Rated Burden : ..................................................

4. Digital Inputs
a. Rated Voltage : ..................................................
b. Rated Voltage tolerance : ..................................................

5. Trip contacts
a. Number of trip contacts : ..................................................
b. Continuous current rating : ..................................................
c. Switching making capacity : ..................................................
d. Switching breaking capacity : ..................................................
e. Current rating for 0.5 sec : ..................................................
f. Rated Voltage : ..................................................

6. Alarm contacts
a. Number of alarm contacts : ..................................................
b. Are they selectable? : ..................................................
c. Rated Voltage : ..................................................

7. Auxiliary Voltage supply of the relay : ..................................................

8. Auxiliary Voltage supply tolerance of the relay : ..................................................

9. Is the offered relay of the draw-out type


and suitable for surface panel mounting? : ..................................................

10. Describe the operating characteristic of the relay : ..................................................


....................................................
....................................................
....................................................

11. Is the relay equipped with current transformer


ratio adaptation (correction)? : ..................................................
....................................................
9

12. Is the relay equipped with current transformer


ratio and angle adaptation? : ..................................................
..................................................

13. Is the relay suitable for transformer + 20KV bus


zone differential protection? : ..................................................

14. Are second and fifth harmonics and


autotransformer inrush currents blocked? : ..................................................
..................................................
..................................................

15. Is restrain provided against external faults with


current transformer saturation? : ..................................................
..................................................
..................................................

16. Is the out- of- balance current due to tap-changing


or current mismatch compensated? : ..................................................

17. Is restricted earth fault protection provided? : ..................................................


..................................................
..................................................

18. Is automatic short-circuiting of the current contacts


available in the case where the current input unit
(if any) is of the draw out type? : ..................................................

19. Degree of protection of the relay case : ..................................................

20. Is the relay equipped with screw type terminals


suitable for 2.5mm2 condructrors? : ..................................................

21. Is the relay equipped with an integral keyboard


and display for parameter setting? : ..................................................

22. Can the relay be set by PC? : ..................................................

23. Is the offered relay equipped with self-diagnostics? : ..................................................

24. Is the offered relay equipped with fault recording? : ..................................................

25. Is the offered relay equipped with measurements


capability? : ..................................................
10

26. Describe in brief the measurement feature


capabilities : ..................................................
..................................................
..................................................
27. Can the offered relay be synchronized via a substation
automation control system’s master clock? : ..................................................
..................................................

28. Is the offered relay equipped with two serial ports?


One for connection to a PC, the other for
connection to the digital computerized substation
control system? : ..................................................

29. What is the communication protocol used for the


connection of the relay to the digital computerized
substation control system? : ..................................................
..................................................
..................................................

30. Is software provided? : ..................................................

31. Type of software provided : ..................................................


..................................................
..................................................

32. Power consumption of the relay : ..................................................

33. Is the offered relay of the modular type? : ..................................................


..................................................

34. Are zero sequence currents filtered? : ..................................................


..................................................

me/AG/26/3/2002
Revision No.2/IIδ/pm/AG/October 2004
Revision No.3/IΙδ/nn/AG/Apri/2006
Revision No.4/IΙδ/πµ/AG/June/2006
PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION OF GREECE S.A.
TRANSMISSION NEW PROJECTS DEPARTMENT September 2005

SPECIFICATION SS – 108/3

N
NUUM
MEER
RIIC
CAAL
LDDIISSTTA
ANNCCEE PPR
ROOT
TE ECCT TIIO
ONNR REEL
LA AY
YSS FFO
ORRT
THHE
E
440000K
KVVTTRRAANNSSM
MIISSSSIIO
ON NLLIIN
NEESS

I. SCOPE
This specification covers the required technical, operational and constructional
characteristics and testing of numerical distance protection relays for 400KV
transmission lines.

II. KEY WORDS


Numerical relays, distance protection relays, relays, digital relays.

III. USE
The distance protection relays are to be used for the protection of each 400KV
transmission line of the 400KV double circuit against phase to phase and phase to ground
faults.
It should be noted that for reasons of increased reliability, two (2) redundant distance
relays of the same type but of different manufacturer are employed for the protection of
each transmission line. One used as back-up.

IV. STANDARDS
The relays shall conform to the latest IEC standards. Relays based on ANSI / IEEE or
DIN / VDE standards can be offered, subject however, to the Purchaser’s approval.

V. OPERATING CONDITIONS
1. Installation : Indoors
2. Temperature range : -5 0 C to 550 C
3. Relative Humidity : 5% to 85 %

VI. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM


1. Rated Voltage (phase to phase) : 400 KV rms
2. Maximum Operating Voltage
(phase to phase) : 420 KV rms
3. Voltage operating range : 380 to 420 KV
4. Rated frequency : 50 Hz

ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/September 2005 Page 1 of 12


5. Number of phases :3
6. System Neutral : Solidly Earthed
7. Frequency Range : 50 Hz ± 0.2 Hz
8. Rated short circuit level : 40KA at 420 KV
9. Maximum permissible duration of
fault to maintain stability : ≤ 500 msec
10. Circuit breaker tripping scheme : 1 pole and 3 pole

VII. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE 400KV TRANSMISSION LINES


The 400KV double circuit transmission lines are not transposed and consist of twin bundle
ACSR conductors, of 954 MCM each. The double circuit line is effectively protected by shield
wires and the towers have a ground resistance up to 20 Ohms maximum.

No of circuits :2
Cross Section, MCM : 954 MCM*
R1, Ohms / Km : 0.03293*
X1, Ohms / Km : 0.3184*
Ro, Ohms / Km : 0.2587*
Xo, Ohms / Km : 1.1740*
Rom, Ohms / Km : 0.2262**
Xom, Ohms / Km : 0.7568**
B1, µmhos / Km : 3.57*
Bo, µmhos / Km : 2.168*
Bom, µmhos / Km : -0.5762**
Length Range : 10 to 180 Km

* Values are for one circuit of a double circuit line.


** Mutual zero sequence quantities between the two circuits.

VIII. INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS


The distance protection relays shall be used in conjunction with instrument transformers which
have the following characteristics

1. Voltage Transformers
− Type : Single-phase, oil immersed of the inductive
type
− Connection : Wye grounded
− Number of secondary windings :3
− Rated output per secondary
winding and class:
Windings 1 and 2 (for metering) : 150 VA, class 0.5
Windings 3 (protection) : 100 VA, class 3P / 0.5
400 100 100 100
Rated transformation ratio : KV − − V
3 3 3 3

ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/September 2005 Page 2 of 12


2. Current Transformers
− Type : Single-phase, oil immersed
− Connection : Wye grounded
− Number secondary windings :4
− Rated output and class per winding
− Winding No1 (for metering) : 60VA, class 0.5
− Winding No2 (for distance protection) : 60VA, class 5P 20
− Winding No3 (for distance protection) : 60VA, class 5P 20
− Winding No4 (for bus differential
protection) : 30VA, class 5P 20
− Rated transformation ratio : 1600 – 800A / 1-1-1-1A

IX. DISTANCE RELAY REQUIRED CHARACTERISTICS

1. Analog inputs
a. Rated Current : 1A AC
b. Rated Voltage : 100 3 V AC
2. Binary (Digital) Inputs
a. Rated Voltage : 220V DC
b. Rated Voltage tolerance : +10%, -15%
c. Number of digital inputs : 12

3. Output Contacts
a. Heavy duty contacts (for breaker operation)
Six (6) N.O., heavy duty contacts with the following characteristics:
− Maximum rated voltage : 250 V DC
− Continuous Current : 5A
− Short-time current, for 0.5 sec : 30A
− Switching making capability : 4A at 250 V DC
− Switching breaking capability
(for DC with L/R <40 msec) : 0.15A at 250V DC
b. Signalling (indication) configurable contacts.
Ten (10) (NO.) contacts with the following characteristics:
− Maximum rated voltage : 250 V DC
− Continuous Current : 1A
− Switching making capability : 0.10A at 250 V DC
− Switching breaking capability
(for DC with L/R <40 msec) : 0.10A at 250V DC

4. Auxiliary supply voltage


a. Rated Voltage : 220V DC
b. Voltage tolerance : +10%, -15%

ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/September 2005 Page 3 of 12


5. Constructional characteristics
a. The distance relay shall preferably be of modular design with plug – in units.
This facilitates repairs and fault tracing.
b. The distance relay shall be suitable for panel flush mounting or semi-flush mounting
or surface panel mounting.
c. Automatic short – circuiting of the current contacts must be foreseen in the case where
the current input unit is of the draw – out type.
d. The relay case shall provide degree of protection IP 51 as per IEC.
e. The distance relay shall be equipped with screw type terminals suitable for 2.5
mm2conductors.

6. Operating Characteristic.
The operating characteristic shall be quadrilateral (polygonal) for all types of faults or
mho only for phase-to-phase faults.

7. Zones
The distance relay shall have at least three (3) distance zones, two (2) in the forward
direction and one (1) in the forward-reverse direction for all type of faults (phase to
phase and phase to earth).
The reach of the distance zones shall be selectable within the range of 0-90: Ω
secondary in the X axis and within the range of 0-30 Ω secondary in the R-axis.

8. Type of distance relay and phase selection


The distance relay shall be of the numerical type and shall ensure clearance of all types
of phase and earth faults in the protected zone and direction with selective three-phase
tripping or single-pole tripping with auto-reclosing. The fault detection shall be done
with impedance excitation and overcurrent criteria. A phase selection shall be included
to provide reliable indentification of fault and phase involved, for correct single-pole
tripping.

9. Operating Time of the distance relay


The operating time of the relay shall be ≤ 20 msec

10. Configuration of the distance relay


All settings (parameterization) shall be input by means of an integrated keyboard and
display and by a PC. The settings shall be stored in a non-volatile memory, so that
they cannot be lost even during interruption of the substation auxiliary voltage and
relay’s internal battery (if available)

11. Protection against Noise and Transients


The distance relay shall be capable of suppressing the influence of switching currents,
transient DC current components, high-frequency transients and harmonics and in
general, shall be capable of operating without problems in a substation enviroment.

ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/September 2005 Page 4 of 12


X. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED DISTANCE RELAY FEATURES

In addition to the basic distance protection features, the distance relay shall have the
following additional features:

1. Switch – on – to – fault protection (SOFT)


By monitoring the manual close command over a defined period, the switch – on – to –
fault feature shall ensure instantaneous tripping without autoreclosing when the circuit
breaker is closed on to a fault.

2. Trip circuit Supervision

3. Teleprotection (carrier interface)


a. The cooperation between the distance protection relays of two circuit breakers
protecting the same circuit and located at its opposite ends, shall be accomplished by
H.F. carrier. The distance relays shall be designed in a such way as to allow adaptation
to the following possible transfer tripping techniques.
The distance relay sensing a fault in its first zone, trips its respective circuit breaker
instantaneously and simultaneously sends a signal via carrier to the distance relay of the
remote end. In case this relay has also started its operation by sensing the fault in the
proper direction, then the incoming signal shall either trip the circuit breaker
(permissive under reaching transfer trip) or shall extend the measuring range of the first
zone.
In case of absence of the H.F. carrier the distance relays shall be capable of operating
independently.
b. Modes of operation
- PUTT (Z1B acceleration) and
- PUTT (acceleration with pickup)

4. Auto reclosure
The range of operational modes shall, be as follows:
a. Fast single-pole auto reclosing for single-phase faults
b. Fast three-pole auto reclosing for multi-phase faults
c. Fast three-pole autoreclosing for all fault types
d. Single or multi shot autoreclosing, up to 3 shots.

5. Synchrocheck

6. Power swing blocking / tripping

7. Fault locator

8. Directional earth fault protection


Directional earth fault protection designed to protect against faults that are highly
resistive and can not be detected by the distance protection function. The directional
earth fault shall have the following selectable feature:

ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/September 2005 Page 5 of 12


− Time delayed three-pole tripping, either definite time or inverse time using a
selection of IEC or ANSI curies

9. Self monitoring (checking)


During operation, self-monitoring shall be performed and in case of an internal fault or
loss of the D.C. auxiliary supply, a signal shall be issued for protection blocking and /
or alarming.

10. Breaker failure protection.


The breaker failure protection by detecting the current flowing through the
corresponding circuit breaker will operate, through a timer, an output contact should the
circuit breaker fails to operate.

11. Disturbance recording (fault recording)


Any disturbance (fault) shall be recorded and stored for analysis. The capacity of
memory shall permit the storage of at least four faults.
In the technical offer, the memory capacity and time length of the faults that can be
stored must be clearly indicated.
Capability shall exist so that the disturbance (fault) data can be read remotely via
modem.
The recording shall include both analog and digital signals. The synchronization source
must be an internal clock and a GPS ratio clock.

12. Measurements (Metering)


The measurement function shall be capable of measuring analog quantities, that is
frequency, voltage, current active and reactive power in real time.

13. Emergency overcurrent protection


Emergency overcurrent protection in the event of loss on AC voltage.

14. Compensation of mutual zero sequence impedance


Compensation of mutual zero sequence impedance between the two parallel circuits of
a double line with the capability to deenergize this function if needed.

XI. COMMUNICATIONS

The relay shall be fitted with two serial ports for reasons of interfacing and specifically
with:

1. One serial port suitable for connection to a PC.


An operator program, running under WINDOWS shall be available to enable user-
friendly parameter setting, analysis of fault data and records and commissioning either
locally or remotely via modem.

ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/September 2005 Page 6 of 12


2. One serial port suitable for system interface. (fiber optic) shall be available for
connection to a digital computerized substation control system. The communication
protocol shall be as per IEC 61850.
3. Besides an internal synchronization clock, the relay must be capable of being
synchronized, via a substation automation control system’s master clock, which has the
capability of GPS synchronization besides of its own.
4. A number of cables for the communication of the relay with PC must be included in
the offer. The number of cables will be determined in the Inquiry.

XII. SOFTWARE
Software, WINDOWS based, for the parameter setting, analysis of fault data and records
and commissioning shall be provided on the basis of a royalty free, non exclusive with
irrevocable license to use by PPC.
The software shall be user friendly and displaying on VDU (screen) all analog
waveforms and digital signals. The software shall be menu-driven.

XIII. TESTS

1. Routine Tests as per IEC 602555-5


a. Dielectric Withstand test :2KV rms, 50Hz, 1 minute, between all
terminals and case earth
b. Impulse Voltage test : 5KV peak, 1.2 / 50µs, 0.5J

2. Type tests.
a. Impulse Voltage test as
per IEC-60255-5 : 5KV peak, 1.2 / 50µs, 0.5J

b. High Frequency test as


per IEC-60255-22-1 : 2.5 KV peak, 1MHz, t = 15µs, 400
shots/sec, duration = 2sec

c. Electrostatic Discharge test


as per IEC-60255-22-2 class III : 4KV contact discharge, 8KV air discharge both
polarities.
d. Fast Transient test as per
IEC-60255-22-4 class III : 2KV, 5KHz, burst length = 15 ms, repetition rate
= 300ms, both polarities, duration = 1min

e. Vibration test as per IEC-60068-2-6: 60Hz to 150Hz, 0.5 acceleration, sweep rate =
10 octaves / min, 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes

NOTE: In case of lack of IEC testing standards, the only other standards that could be
considered are VDE and ANSI / IEEE, subject, however to the purchaser’s approval.

ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/September 2005 Page 7 of 12


XIV. INFORMATION WHICH MUST BE PROVIDED BY ALL BIDDERS

1. All necessary technical pamphlets and technical information so that the technical
evaluation of the offered distance relay can be carried out.

2. Outline drawings with over-all dimensions and wiring diagrams of the offered distance
relays.

3. Any test certificates for all specified type tests in this hereby specification may be
submitted along with the technical offer.
Acceptance or not of the submitted test certificates will be subject to the purchaser’s
approval.

4. A list of recommended spare parts shall be submitted and prices must be indicated in
the economic offer. Purchaser maintains the right to purchase all or some or none of the
proposed spare parts.

5. A reference list shall be submitted and in which the following shall be included:
− Country and buyer
− Type of the relay
− Number of units sold
− Year of sale.

6. All bidders are required to complete attachment “A”. Failure to comply with this request
or submission of attachment “A” incomplete shall constitute sufficient reason for
rejection of the offer.

XV. DATA WHICH MUST BE PROVIDED BY THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER.

1. Complete functional and wiring drawings for approval before shipment of the relays.

2. Complete outline dimensional drawings for approval before shipment of the relays.

3. All necessary documentation concerning installation, commissioning, operation,


maintenance, parameter setting and trouble shooting of the relay.

4. Complete instructions for the operation and application of the related software.

XVI. PACKING
Each relay with all of its units (if any) shall be packaged separately inside a robust box
properly labeled.

ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/September 2005 Page 8 of 12


A
ATTTTA
ACCH
HEEM
MEEN
NTT ““A
A””

1. Type of the offered relay :……………………………………………

2. Temperature tolerance range :. .……………………………………………

3. Analog Inputs of the relay:


a. Rated current : ……………………………………………
b. Rated voltage : ……………………………………………

4. Digital Inputs:
a. Rated voltage : ……………………………………………
b. Rated voltage tolerance : ……………………………………………
c. Number of inputs : ……………………………………………

5. Heavy duty Output Contacts


a. Number of heavy duty contacts : ……………………………………………
b. Continuous current : ……………………………………………
c. Short-time current (0.5 sec) : ……………………………………………
d. Switching making capability : ……………………………………………
e. Switching breaking capability : ……………………………………………

6. Signaling contacts
a. Are they configurable? : ……………………………………………
b. Number of signaling contacts : ……………………………………………
c. Rated voltage : ……………………………………………
d. Continuous current : ……………………………………………
e. Switching making capability : ……………………………………………
f. Switching breaking capability

7. Auxiliary supply voltage : ……………………………………………

8. Auxiliary supply voltage tolerance : ……………………………………………

9. Is the offered relay of the modular design


type? : ……………………………………………

10. Is the offered relay suitable for panel flush


mounting? : ……………………………………………

11. Is automatic short-circuiting of the current


contacts available in the case where the
current input unit is of the draw out type? : ……………………………………………

12. Degree of protection of the relay case : ……………………………………………

ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/September 2005 Page 9 of 12


13. Is the relay equipped with screw type
terminals suitable for 2.5mm2 conductors : ……………………………………………

14. Type of measurement characteristic : ……………………………………………

15. Number and description of the zones : ……………………………………………


………………………………………………
………………………………………………

16. Reach of the zones : ……………………………………………


..……………………………………………
..……………………………………………

17. Are the zones selectable? : ……………………………………………

18. Criteria used for fault detection : ……………………………………………


..……………………………………………

19. Operating (response) time of the relay : ……………………………………………

20. Reset time of the relay : ……………………………………………

21. Is the relay equipped with an integral


keyboard and display for parameter setting?: ……………………………………………

22. Can the relay be set by PC? : ……………………………………………

23. How is the relay protected against


electrical noise and transients? : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………

24. Is the relay equipped with switch onto


fault protection? : ……………………………………………

25. Is the relay equipped with trip circuit


supervision? : ……………………………………………

26. Does the offered relay comply with the


requirements of paragraph X-3? : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………
..……………………………………………
..……………………………………………

27. Describe the autoreclosure feature of the


offered relay : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………
..……………………………………………
..……………………………………………

ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/September 2005 Page 10 of 12


28. Is the offered relay equipped with
synchrocheck? : ……………………………………………

29. Is the offered relay equipped with Power


swing blocking? : ……………………………………………

30. Is the offered relay equipped with


fault locator? : ……………………………………………

31. Is the offered relay equipped with


directional earth fault protection? : ……………………………………………

32. Is the offered relay equipped with


self monitoring (checking) feature? : ……………………………………………

33. Is the offered relay equipped with


breaker failure protection? : ……………………………………………

34. Describe how the breaker failure protection


feature operates : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………
..……………………………………………
...……………………………………………

35. Is the offered relay equipped with


disturbance recording? : ……………………………………………

36. Is the offered relay equipped with internal


synchronization clock? : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………

37. Can the offered relay be synchronized via


a master clock belonging to a substation
automation control system? : ……………………………………………

38. Is the offered relay equipped with


measurement feature? : ……………………………………………

39. Is the offered relay equipped with two


serial ports? One for connection to a PC, the
other for connection to a digital
computerized substation control system? : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………
..……………………………………………

40. What is the communication protocol used


for the connection of the relay to the digital
computerized substation control system? : ……………………………………………

ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/September 2005 Page 11 of 12


41. Is software provided? : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………
42. Is a number of cables for the
communication of the relay
with PC provided? : ……………………………………………

43. Is the software windows based? : ……………………………………………

44. Can the software be used for parameter


settings, analysis of fault data and record
and commissioning? : ……………………………………………

45. What is the memory capacity of the


disturbance recorder? : ……………………………………………

46. Haw many faults can be stored in the


memory of the disturbance recorder? And
what is the time length of fault? : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………

47. For the teleportaction function, indicate


modes of operation : ……………………………………………
..……………………………………………
…………………………………………….
…………………………………………….

ΙΙδ/p.m/A.G/September 2005 Page 12 of 12


PUBLIC POWER CORPORATION S.A
T/NPRD/Substation Specifications and Equipment
Section

SPECIFICATION SS-131 / 6

PHASE AND EARTH


DEFINITE AND INVERSE TIME
OVERCURRENT RELAYS
WITH DIRECTIONAL CAPABILITY
FOR BOTH PHASE AND EARTH
FOR 150 kV TRANSMISSION LINE & TRANSFORMERS
BAYS PROTECTION

ATHENS - GREECE
---*---
November 2008
-2-

SPECIFICATION SS-131 / 6
PHASE AND EARTH
DEFINITE AND INVERSE TIME
OVERCURRENT RELAYS
WITH DIRECTIONAL CAPABILITY FOR BOTH PHASE
AND EARTH
FOR 150kV TRANSMISSION LINE TRANSFORMER
BAYS & PROTECTION.
I. SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements concerning the technical
and operational characteristics of definite time and inverse time 3-
phase and earth overcurrent relays with directional capability for both
phase and earth.
The relays are to be used as back-up protection for the 150 kV
Transmission Lines and 150kV Transformers bays.

II. KEYWORDS
Overcurrent relays, phase and earth (ground).

III. 150 kV SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS


Current transformer ratio : 500 - 1000 / 1A.
Voltage transformer ratio : 160000/√3 : 120/√3 V
System nominal voltage : 150 kV
Maximum system voltage : 170 kV
System frequency : 50 Hz
Number of CTs : 3, single phase
Number of VTs : 3, single phase

IV. RELAY MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS


1. The relay shall be housed in a case which shall be suitable for
flush panel mounting or surface panel mounting.
2. The relay shall be suitable for rear or front connection.
3. The relay shall be equipped with screw type (preferably) terminal
blocks which shall be suitable for 2.5 mm2 conductors.

V. RELAY REQUIRED AUXILIARY VOLTAGE


(POWER SUPPLY)
The relay auxiliary voltage must be : 110 V DC.

VI. RELAY REQUIRED FUNCTIONS


The relay must be equipped with the following functions:
a. Definite time overcurrent phase and earth protection with two (2)
overcurrent stages, low and high, for both phase and earth (I>,
-3-

I>>, IΕ> and IΕ>>) and with directional capability for both phase
and earth.
b. Inverse time overcurrent phase and earth protection with
overcurrents stage, for both phase and earth (I>, IΕ>) and with
directional capability for both phase and earth.

c. The inverse overcurrent phase and earth protection must


include curve types either based on IEC or IEEE/ANSI as
indicated below:

per per
IEEE / ANSI IEC

Short-time inverse Short-time inverse


Moderately inverse Standard inverse
Inverse Very inverse
Very inverse Extremely inverse
Extremely inverse Long-time inverse

d. Breaker failure protection. This function will check the fault


current exciting the relay for a certain (adjustable) period of time
after the trip command has been given to the relevant circuit
breaker. In case the fault current exists after this period of time
(meaning the breaker has failed to open) an appropriate contact
of the relay should be energised.

VII. RELAY REQUIRED RATED CURRENT AND VOLTAGE


INPUT AND RATED FREQUENCY.
1. Rated current (Ιn) : 1A
2. Rated voltage (Un) : 120/√3 V
3. Rated frequency (fn) : 50 Hz

VIII. INFORMATION WHICH THE SUPPLIER MUST KNOW


FOR THE PHASE AND EARTH DIRECTIONAL
CAPABILITY OF THE RELAY
Because the relay will be supplied by three single place CTs and three
single-phase VTs, it must be capable of calculating the earth current
(Io) and earth voltage (Vo) by itself.
-4-

IX. RELAY REQUIRED SETTING RANGES

a. Definite-time overcurrent element.


a.1.

Low Overcurrent Element Range

Phase (Ι >) (0.1-3) x In in steps of 0.1 A


Earth (ΙΕ >) (0.1-3) x In in steps of 0.1 A
Delay time for Ι > and ΙΕ > 0.1-6 s in steps of 0.1 s

a.2.

High Overcurrent Element Range

Phase (Ι >>) (0.5-8) x In in steps of 0.1 A


Earth (ΙΕ >>) (0.5-8) x In in steps of 0.1 A
Delay time for Ι >> and ΙΕ >> 0.1–6 s in steps of 0.1 s

b. Inverse-time overcurrent element.

Overcurrent Element Range

Phase (Ι >) (0.1-3) x In in steps of 0.1 A


Earth (ΙΕ >) (0.1-3) x In in steps of 0.1 A
Time multiplier 0.1-3.2s in steps of 0.1 s

X. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
The relay must be :

a. of the numerical type.

b. equipped with fault recording capability

c. capable of blocking 2hd harmonics

d. equipped with at least seven (7) NO output contacts. Six (6) of


them will be programmable to allow the user to choose which of
the definite time or the inverse time elements (I>, I>>, IΕ>, ΙE>>)
are related to the contacts. One (1) contact will be related to the
function of breaker failure and it will be time adjustable.
The output contacts must have the following characteristics

- Continuous current rating: 5 Α.


- Breaking capacity : 0.3 Α at 110 V DC for L/R=40 ms
- Making capacity: 30 A for 0.5 s
-5-

XI. RELAY MEANS OF CONFIGURATION


The relay shall be configured via :
a. an integrated keypad and an LC screen.
b. a PC through a proper port and appropriate software which must
be included in the supply.

XII. SOFTWARE
Any software need for the parameterization and setting of the relay
must be supplied

XIII. TESTS

a. Routine tests.

a.1. Insulation tests as per IEC 60255-5.

a.1.1. Dielectric withstand : 2 kV rms, 50 Hz, 1 min,


between all terminals and case earth.

b. Type tests.

b.1. Impulse test as per IEC 60255-5 : 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J

b.2. High frequency test


as per IEC 60255-2-1, class ΙΙΙ
or ΙΕΕΕ / ANSI C 37.90.1 : 2.5 kV peak, 1 MHz,
400 shots per second,
duration = 2 s.

b.3. Fast transient test


as per IEC 60801-4, class ΙΙΙ / IV : 4 kV

b.4. Vibration test


as per IEC 60068-2-6 : Acceleration : 0.5g + 25%
Frequency range: 10 – 150 Hz
Number of sweep cycles: 20
Sweep rate: 1 octave / mm + 10%.
Duration of endurance:2 hours
30 minutes

NOTE :
Bidders are required to submit, if available, any official test reports for
all of the above tests along with their technical offer. Acceptance or not
lies on the judgment of PPC S.A.
-6-

XIV. ADDITIONAL DATA TO BE SUPPLIED BY BIDDERS


1. Reference list
A reference list of the offered type relay shall be submitted in
which the following shall be included :
- Country and Customer
- Number of installed relays
- Date of order.

2. Drawings pamphlets
Bidders are requested to submit along with their technical offers,
outline drawings, wiring diagrams and any information and data
which will attributed to the compete description of the offered
relay.

3. Connection drawing of the relay with CTs and VTs


In the offer, a connection diagram must be included depicting the
connection of the relay to the available CTs and VTs

XV. ATTACHMENT “Α”


Bidders are requested to complete attachment “Α”.
Failure to comply with this request will constitute sufficient reason for
rejection of the offer.

XVI. COMMUNICATION AND INTERFACES


The relay shall be fitted with two (2) serial ports for reasons of
interfacing and specifically with:

1. One serial port suitable for the connection to a PC.


An operator program shall be available to enable user friendly
parameterization of the relay.

2. One serial port suitable for system interface shall be available for
connection to a digital computerized substation control system. The
communication protocol shall be as per IEC 61850. The relevant
certificates, in accordance with IEC 61850-10, must be submitted.
The certificates must be of level A (level A means independent
Lab, e.g. KEMA).
The certificates can be of level B (manufacturer’s Lab), if the
manufacturer’s Lab has been qualified by the UCA International
Users Group.
In the first case the certificates (level A) must be submitted along
with technical offer. In the second case the certificates (level B)
along with the UCA International Users Group certification to the
manufacturer must be submitted in the technical offer.

XVI. GUARANTEE
Guarantee of good operation for a period of at least five (5) years
must be provided.
-7-

SPECIFICATION SS-131 / 6
PHASE AND EARTH
DEFINITE AND INVERSE TIME
OVERCURRENT RELAYS
WITH DIRECTIONAL CAPABILITY FOR BOTH PHASE
AND EARTH
FOR 150 kV TRANSMISSION LINE PROTECTION

ATTACHMENT “A”

1. Type of the offered relay : …………………………………..


2. Is the offered relay suitable for
flush mounting or surface
mounting? : …………………………………..

3. Relay rated current : …………………………………..

4. Relay rated voltage : …………………………………

5. Relay rated frequency : …………………………………..

6. Relay auxiliary voltage


(Power supply) : …………………………………..
7. Are the relay’s terminals of the
screw type and suitable for
2.5 mm2 conductors ? : …………………………………..
8. Does the relay meet the required
functions listed in paragraph VI
of the specification ? : …………………………………..

9. Relay setting ranges.


9.a. Definite Time.
9.a.1.

Low Overcurrent Element Range

Phase ………….. x In in steps


Earth ………….. x In in steps
Delay time for phase and earth ……………… in steps
-8-

9.a.2.

High Overcurrent Element Range

Phase ………….. x In in steps


Earth ………….. x In in steps
Delay time for phase and earth …………… in steps

9.b. Inverse Time.

Overcurrent Element Range

Phase ………….. x In in steps


Earth ………….. x In in steps
Time multiplier ………………. in steps

10. Can the relay block 2hd harmonics ? : …………………………………..

11. List all relay contacts and their


characteristics : …………………………………..
(acc. § X.d) …………………………………..
…………………………………..

12. Is the relay equipped with fault


recording capability? : ………………………………….

13. Is the relay equipped with breaker


failure function? : ………………………………….

14. Can the relay operated with the


the assumptions of paragraph VIII? : ………………………………….

15. Is any parameterization software


provided? : ………………………………….

16. Is the offered relay equipped with two (2)


serial ports? One for connection to a PC,
and the other for connection to a digital
computerized substation control system? : ………………..………..……

17. Can the relay be configured by an


integrated keyboard and an LC screen
and also by a PC? : ………………………………

18. Is guarantee of good operation for a period


of at least five (5) years provided ? : …………………………………

19. Have the offered relays been certified


-9-

by conformance test performed in


accordance with IEC 61850-10? : ………………………………..…
-Are certificates provided? : …………………………….…….

20. Power consumption of the relay : ………………………………….

21. Weight of the relay : ………………………………….

22. Dimensions of the relay : ………………………………….

II/AG/a.k/SS-131e/18.07.2000
ΙΙδ/pm/AG/JUNE 2004
IIδ/GS/August 2006
ΙΙδ/pm/IA/July 2008
ΙΙδ/pt/IA/November 2008

You might also like